FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Modules

Catalog Numbers 5094-IF8, 5094-IF8XT, 5094-IY8, 5094-IY8XT,

5094-OF8, 5094-OF8XT, 5094-IRT8S, 5094-IRT8SXT

User Manual Original Instructions

FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Modules User Manual

Important User Information

Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and operation of this equipment before
you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to
requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.

Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably
trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.

If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this
equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with
any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is prohibited.

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

These labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.

BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.

ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).

The following icon may appear in the text of this document.

Identifies information that is useful and can help to make a process easier to do or easier to understand.

Rockwell Automation recognizes that some of the terms that are currently used in our industry and in this publication are not in alignment
with the movement toward inclusive language in technology. We are proactively collaborating with industry peers to find alternatives to such
terms and making changes to our products and content. Please excuse the use of such terms in our content while we implement these
changes.

2 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Table of Contents

Preface
About This Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Download Firmware, AOP, EDS, and Other Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Feature Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Chapter 1
FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Construct a 5094 FLEX 5000
Operation in a Logix 5000 I/O System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Control System
Controller and Software Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Controller Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Firmware and Software Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Secure Access to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Types of Analog I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
FLEX 5000 I/O System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Configure the Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connections for Standard Analog I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connection Types Available with Standard Analog I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Data Types Available with Standard Analog I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Requested Packet Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connections for Safety Analog I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
‘Configured By’ Options Available for Safety Analog I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Requested Packet Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connection Over an EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Input Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Output Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Listen Only Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Protected Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Chapter 2
Common Analog I/O Module Rolling Timestamp of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Features Rolling Timestamp with the 5094-IF8 and 5094-IY8, and 5094-IRT8S Modules . . 27
Rolling Timestamp with the 5094-OF8 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Floating Point Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Module Data Quality Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Calibration Causes Uncertain Data Quality Indication on Input Module Groups . . 29
Software Configurable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fault and Status Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Module Inhibiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 3
Table of Contents

Electronic Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Producer/Consumer Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Use CIP Sync Time with
I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Alarm Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Enable Latching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Unlatch Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Data Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Module Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Absolute Accuracy at 25 °C (77 °F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Module Accuracy Drift with Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Module Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Chapter 3
5094-IF8 Analog Input Module Multiple Input Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Features Notch Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Digital Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Underrange/Overrange Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Process Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Rate Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Sensor Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Open Wire Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Over Temperature Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Field Power Loss Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Fault and Status Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Chapter 4
Current/Voltage/Temperature- Multiple Input Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/ Notch Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Relationship between Notch Filter Settings and RPI Setting (5094-IY8 Only) . . . . 47
Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S)
Considerations When Using Different Notch Filter Selections
Analog Input Module Features (5094-IRT8S only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Digital Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Underrange/Overrange Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Process Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Rate Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Sensor Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Sensor Type Temperature Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Sensor Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
10 Ohm Copper Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Open Wire Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Temperature Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Over Temperature Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Critical Temperature Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Field Power Loss Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Cold Junction Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Remote Cold Junction (5094-IY8 Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Cold Junction Disable Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025
 Table of Contents

Input SSV Switch Enable (5094-IY8 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Safety Input Fault Reset (5094-IRT8S only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Recoverable and Unrecoverable Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fault and Status Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Chapter 5
5094-OF8 Analog Output Module Multiple Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Features Channel Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Hold for Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Connection Fault Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Output Behavior Immediately After a Connection Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fault State Duration After Connection Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Final Fault State Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Output State Once Connection is Re-established . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Output Clamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Clamp Alarming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Output Ramping/Rate Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Data Echo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
No Load Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Short Circuit Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Over Temperature Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Field Power Loss Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Fault and Status Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Chapter 6
Safety I/O Module Features Safety Application Suitability Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Safety Considerations for Module Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Single-channel or Dual-channel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Determine Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Safety Application Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Safe State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Configuration Signature and Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Configuration Signature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Configuration Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Different Configuration Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Reset FLEX 5000 safety I/O Modules to Out-of-Box State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Chapter 7
Configure Standard Analog I/O Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Modules Create a New Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Discover Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
New Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Edit the Module Configuration Common Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
General Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Connection Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Module Info Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Edit 5094-IF8 Module Configuration Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 5

Table of Contents

Channels Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Calibration Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Edit 5094-IY8 Module Configuration Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Channels Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
CJ Channels Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Calibration Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Edit 5094-OF8 Module Configuration Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Channels Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Calibration Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
View the Module Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Chapter 8
Configure and Replace Safety Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Analog I/O Modules Create a New Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Edit the Module Configuration Common Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
General Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Connection Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Safety Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Module Info Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Edit 5094-IRT8S Module Configuration Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Channels Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Calibration Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
View the Module Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Calibrate a Safety Analog
I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Start the Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Revert to Factory Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Replace a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Set the SNN Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Reset to Out-of-Box Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Replace a Module in a Logix 5000 System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Chapter 9
Calibrate the Modules Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Controller State During Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Calibration Impacts Data Quality on Entire Input Module Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Difference Between Calibrating an Input Module and an Output Module. . . . . . . . . . . 110
Calibrate the Input Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Calibrate the 5094-IF8 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Calibrate the 5094-IY8 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Calibrate the Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Calibrate a 5094-OF8 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Appendix A
Troubleshoot Your Module SA Power Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Module Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
FLEX 5000 Analog Input Modules Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Table of Contents

FLEX 5000 Analog Output Modules Status Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer Application for Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Warning Signal in the I/O Configuration Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Status and Fault Information in Module Properties Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Application Tag Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Appendix B
Module Tag Definitions Tag Name Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Access the Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5094-IF8 Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Configuration Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Output Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5094-IY8 Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Configuration Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Output Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5094-OF8 Module Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Configuration Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Output Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5094-IRT8S Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Output Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Appendix C
Application/Wiring Examples 5094-IRT8S and 5094-IRT8SXT Module Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
for Safety I/O Modules
Appendix D
Safety Data for Safety I/O FLEX 5000 I/O Safety Input Module Safety Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Modules Safety Reaction Time (5094-IRT8S, 5094-IRT8SXT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 7

Table of Contents

Notes:

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Preface

About This Publication This manual describes how to use FLEX 5000® analog standard and safety I/O modules in
Logix 5000® control systems.

Make sure that you are familiar with the following:

• Use of a controller in a Logix 5000 control system
• Operation of safety systems
• Use of an EtherNet/IP™ network, if the analog I/O modules are installed in a remote
location from the controller that is accessible via the EtherNet/IP network
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer environment

Download Firmware, AOP, Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access product release
notes from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at rok.auto/pcdc.
EDS, and Other Files
Summary of Changes This publication contains the following new or updated information. This list includes
substantive updates only and is not intended to reflect all changes.
Topic Page
Updated Additional Resources 11
Replaced publication reference ENET-UM004 with 5094-UM005 11, 18, 75, 80, 91
Updated topic Remote Cold Junction (5094-IY8 Only) 59
Updated section Chxx Category for 5094-IY8 module 84
Updated 5094-IY8 module configuration tag definitions for tags CJChxx.Disable and 136
CJChxx.Remote

Manual Conventions Within this manual, we simplified product names and added product icons for your ease of
use.
We use standard module to indicate a module that does not have functional safety capability.
We use safety module to indicate a module with functional safety capability (catalog numbers
ending in “S” or “SXT”). Further, we use FLEX 5000 I/O module to indicate when a concept or
task applies to both the standard and safety analog I/O modules.

Throughout this publication, the term Logix 5000 controller refers to the controllers with
which you can use FLEX 5000 I/O modules in a given capacity. The term does not refer to all
Logix 5000 controllers.

Feature Support Throughout this manual, the table at left indicates the analog I/O modules that support the
feature that is described in that chapter or section.
Applies to these modules:
• If both standard and safety modules support a feature, both module types are in the
5094 Standard HART I/O Modules table. Any difference in operation between the modules for that feature is
5094 Safety HART I/O Modules communicated in the text in the chapter or section.
• If only one type of module, standard or safety, supports a feature, only that module type
appears in the table.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 9

Preface

Terminology This table defines terms that are used in this manual.
Abbreviation Full Term Definition
An industrial communication protocol that is used by Logix 5000-based
CIP™ Common Industrial Protocol automation systems on EtherNet/IP, ControlNet®, and DeviceNet®
communication networks.
CIP Sync provides the increased control coordination needed for control
Common Industrial Protocol Synchronization
CIP Sync™ applications where absolute time synchronization is vital to achieve real-time
synchronization between distributed intelligent devices and systems.
CIP Safety™ Common Industrial Protocol – Safety Certified SIL-rated version of CIP.
Logical communication channel for communication between nodes.
— Connection Connections are maintained and controlled between masters and slaves.
CL Claim Limit The maximum safety integrity level (SIL) that can be achieved.
DC Diagnostic Coverage The ratio of the detected failure rate to the total failure rate.
A template that is used in RSNetWorx™ software to display the configuration
parameters, I/O data profile, and connection-type support for a given I/O
EDS Electronic Data Sheet module. RSNetWorx software uses these simple text files to identify products
and commission them on a network.
EN European Norm. The official European Standard.
Used for backup for memory retention at powerdown on controllers. The ESS is
ESS Energy Storage System inside the controller and cannot be removed.
A ladder logic instruction that retrieves specified controller status information
GSV Get System Value and places it in a destination tag.
The length of time that a device or other product is expected to remain reliable
MTTF Mean Time To Failure
in operation.
— Multicast The transmission of information from one sender to multiple receivers.
The translation of an Internet Protocol (IP) address to another IP address on
NAT Network Address Translation another network.
A nonprofit association of vendors that are established for the promotion of CIP
ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association networks.
Computer that is used to interface with and control a Logix-based system via
PC Personal computer the Studio 5000® environment.
The average probability of a system to fail to perform its design function on
PFD Probability of Failure on Demand demand.
PFH Average frequency of a dangerous failure per hour The probability of a system to have a dangerous failure occur per hour.
PL Performance Level ISO 13849-1 safety rating.
Periodic test that detects failures in a safety-related system so that, if
— Proof test necessary, the system can be restored to an as-new condition or as close as
practical to this condition.
— Safety (devices) Devices or portions of devices that have functional safety capability.
A relative level of risk-reduction provided by a safety function, or to specify a
SIL Safety Integrity Level target level of risk reduction.
SNN Safety Network Number A unique number that identifies a section of a safety network.
SRT Safety Reaction Time A consideration of delays or latencies within the safety system.
SSV Set System Value A ladder logic instruction that sets controller system data.
— Standard (devices) Devices or portions of devices that do not have functional safety capability.
— Unicast The transmission of information from one sender to one receiver.

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Preface

Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell
Automation.
Resource Description
Provides specifications for FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapters and FLEX 5000
FLEX 5000 Module Specifications Technical Data, publication 5094-TD001 modules.
FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP Adapters with RJ45 Ports Installation Instructions, Describes how to install and wire the EtherNet/IP adapters with RJ45 ports.
publication 5094-IN001
FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP Adapters with SFP Support Installation Instructions, Describes how to install and wire the EtherNet/IP adapters with SFP support.
publication 5094-IN002
FLEX 5000 Analog 8-channel Current/Voltage Input Modules Installation Instructions, Describes how to install and wire the 5094-IF8 and 5094-IF8XT analog input
publication 5094-IN006 modules.
FLEX 5000 Analog 8-channel Current/Voltage Output Modules Installation Describes how to install and wire the 5094-OF8 and 5094-OF8XT analog output
Instructions, publication 5094-IN007 modules.
FLEX 5000 Analog 8-channel Current/Voltage/RTD/Thermocouple Input Modules Describes how to install and wire the 5094-IY8 and 5094-IY8XT analog input
Installation Instructions, publication 5094-IN008 modules.
FLEX 5000 Analog 8-channel RTD/Thermocouple Safety Input Modules Installation Describes how to install and wire the 5094-IRT8S and 5094-IRT8SXT analog safety
Instructions, publication 5094-IN018 input modules.
FLEX 5000 Terminal Base Assembly Modules Installation Instructions, publication Describes how to install and wire the terminal base assemblies for the FLEX 5000
5094-IN010 system.
Describes how to configure, operate, and troubleshoot FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP
FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual, publication 5094-UM005 adapters.
CompactLogix 5380 and Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controllers User Manual, Describes how to configure, operate, and troubleshoot CompactLogix® and Compact
publication 5069-UM001 GuardLogix® 5380 controllers.
ControlLogix 5580 and GuardLogix 5580 Controllers User Manual, Describes how to configure, operate, and troubleshoot ControlLogix® and GuardLogix
publication 1756-UM543 5580 controllers.
Contains detailed requirements for achieving and maintaining SIL 2/PLd and SIL 3/
GuardLogix 5580 and Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controller Systems PLe with the GuardLogix 5580 and Compact GuardLogix 5380 controller systems,
Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM012 using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
Electronic Keying in Logix 5000 Control Systems Application Technique, publication
LOGIX-AT001 Describes how to use electronic keying in Logix 5000 control system applications.
Describes how to configure and use EtherNet/IP devices to communicate on the
EtherNet/IP Network Devices User Manual, publication ENET-UM006 EtherNet/IP network.
Describes basic Ethernet concepts, infrastructure components, and infrastructure
Ethernet Reference Manual, publication ENET-RM002 features.
Provides guidance on how to conduct security assessments, implement Rockwell
System Security Design Guidelines Reference Manual, publication SECURE-RM001 Automation products in a secure system, harden the control system, manage user
access, and dispose of equipment.
Converged Plantwide Ethernet (CPwE) Design and Implementation Guide, Provides information about CIP Sync technology and how to synchronize clocks
publication ENET-TD001 within the Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture® system.
Designed to harmonize with NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.1-1987 and
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid-state provides general guidelines for the application, installation, and maintenance of
Control, publication SGI-1.1 solid-state control in the form of individual devices or packaged assemblies
incorporating solid-state components.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Helps configure complete, valid catalog numbers and build complete quotes based
Product Selection and Configuration tools, rok.auto/systemtools on detailed product information.
Provides coordinated high-fault branch circuit solutions for motor starters, soft
Rockwell Automation Global SCCR tool, rok.auto/sccr starters, and component drives.
Product Certifications website, rok.auto/certifications Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
Download Safety Automation Builder® software to help simplify machine safety
design and validation, and reduce time and costs. Integration with our risk
assessment software provides you with consistent, reliable, and documented
management of the Functional Safety Lifecycle.
Safety Automation Builder and SISTEMA Library, https://rok.auto/sistema
The SISTEMA tool, also available for download from the Safety Automation Builder
page, automates calculation of the attained Performance Level from the safety-
related parts of a machine’s control system to (EN) ISO 13849-1.

You can view or download publications at rok.auto/literature.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 11

Preface

Notes:

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 1
FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Operation in a
Logix 5000 Control System

IMPORTANT You cannot use FLEX 5000 I/O modules with all Logix 5000 controllers.
For example, you can use FLEX 5000 I/O modules with CompactLogix
5380 and ControlLogix 5580 controllers but not with CompactLogix
5370 and ControlLogix 5570 controllers.
You can use FLEX 5000 I/O modules with Logix 5000 controllers as
remote I/O modules only.
Throughout this publication, the term Logix 5000 controller refers to
the controllers with which you can use FLEX 5000 I/O modules in a
given capacity. The term does not refer to all Logix 5000 controllers.
For the most current information on the Logix 5000 controllers with
which you can use FLEX 5000 I/O modules, see the product description
at http://www.ab.com.

Logix 5000 controllers use FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules to control devices in a control
system. The controllers access the modules over an EtherNet/IP network. FLEX 5000 analog
I/O modules use terminal base (TB) assemblies to connect field-side wiring.
FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules convert analog signals to digital values for inputs and convert
digital values to analog signals for outputs. Controllers use these signals for control purposes.
FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules use the Producer/Consumer network communication model.
This communication is an intelligent data exchange between modules and other system
devices in which each module produces data without first being polled.

You use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, version 31 or later, to configure the
standard I/O modules.

You use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, version 33 or later, to configure the safety
I/O modules.

You use FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules as remote I/O modules that are accessible via an
EtherNet/IP network. The modules are installed to the right of a FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP
adapter.

Logix 5000 controllers can exchange data with the modules over the network.

Figure 1 shows a standard controller with standard I/O modules. Standard controllers do not
support safety I/O modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 13

Chapter 1 FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Operation in a Logix 5000 Control System

Figure 1 - FLEX 5000 Standard I/O Modules in a Logix 5000 Control System

X100
FLEX 5000 I/O FLEX 5000 I/O FLEX 5000 I/O
® ® ®
POWER STATUS POWER STATUS POWER STATUS
FLEX 5000 I/O
®

EtherNet/IP™ Adapter

X10 STATUS

NET

LINK 1 5094-IF8 ANALOG 8 INPUT 2 1 TB3 5094-IY8 UNIVERSAL ANALOG 8 INPUT 3 3 TB3T 5094-OF8 ANALOG 8 OUTPUT 3 1 TB3
X1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IP ADDRESS LINK 2
5094-AENTR
POWER
PRP
DLR

5069-L340ERM EtherNet/IP Network 5094-AENTR 5094 Standard I/O

Figure 2 shows a safety controller with standard and safety I/O modules. Safety controllers
support both standard and safety I/O modules.
Figure 2 - FLEX 5000 Safety I/O Modules in a Logix 5000 Control System

SIL2 CPU

5069-L3100ERMS2
X100
FLEX 5000 I/O FLEX 5000 I/O
® ®
POWER STATUS POWER STATUS
FLEX 5000 I/O
®
POWER STATUS
FLEX 5000 I/O
®

EtherNet/IP™ Adapter

X10 STATUS

NET

LINK 1 5094-IRT8S SAFETY RTD/TC 8 INPUT 3 4 TB3IT 5094-IRT8S SAFETY RTD/TC 8 INPUT 3 4 TB3IT 5094-OW8I RELAY 8 OUTPUT ISOLATED 2 2 TB3W
MOD Power

X1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IP ADDRESS LINK 2
5094-AENTR
POWER
PRP
DLR
SA Power

Compact GuardLogix

5069-L340ERMS2/3 EtherNet/IP Network 5094-AENTR 5094 Safety I/O 5094 Standard I/O

Construct a 5094 FLEX 5000 FLEX 5000 I/O is a small, modular I/O system for distributed applications that performs all of
the functions of rack-based I/O. The FLEX system contains the components pictured below.
I/O System
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules

Adapter I/O Module Terminal Base End Caps

X100
FLEX 5000 I/O
TM

EtherNet/IP™ Adapter

X10 STATUS

NET

LINK 1
X1

IP ADDRESS LINK 2
5094-AENTR
POWER
PRP
DLR

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 1 FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Operation in a Logix 5000 Control System

• Adapter - Transfers read and write configuration data to and from the
I/O module
• Terminal base - Contains a terminal strip to terminate wiring for two- or three-wire
devices
• I/O modules - Contains the bus interface and circuitry needed to perform specific
functions related to your application
• End cap - Basically a dust cap for the last module in a rack

Before You Begin Before you use your analog I/O module, you must complete the following:
Applies to these modules:
a. Install a FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapter.
5094 Standard I/O Modules b. Install the FLEX 5000 I/O modules to the right of adapter.
5094 Safety I/O Modules c. Install an EtherNet/IP network.
d. Install the Logix 5000 controller that accesses the FLEX 5000 I/O modules via an
EtherNet/IP network.

Make sure that you have enough FLEX 5000 terminal base (TB) assemblies to satisfy your
application needs. For more information, see the FLEX 5000 Terminal Base Assembly Modules
Installation Instructions, publication 5094-IN010.

IMPORTANT TBs are not included with your module and are not available for
purchase. TBs consist of a mounting base (MB) and removable terminal
block (RTB). You must purchase MBs and RTBs separately and assemble
them together.

Controller and Software Controller and programming software compatibility requirements apply when you use FLEX
5000 standard and safety I/O modules. A module type and how it is used affect which
Compatibility requirements apply.
Applies to these modules:
You must also consider Studio 5000 Logix Designer application version requirements when
5094 Standard I/O Modules
you design your system. For example, you can use FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules with only
5094 Safety I/O Modules version 33 or greater of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.

Controller Compatibility
Compatibility between Logix 5000 controllers and FLEX 5000 I/O modules varies based on
module type, that is, whether the module is standard or safety.

While you must pair safety I/O with a safety controller, you can also pair standard I/O with a
safety controller. For example, ControlLogix 5580 and CompactLogix 5380 controllers are
compatible with FLEX 5000 standard I/O modules. GuardLogix 5580 and Compact GuardLogix
5380 controllers are compatible with FLEX 5000 standard and safety I/O modules.

Firmware and Software Compatibility

Table 1 shows module compatibility when you use FLEX 5000 I/O standard and safety modules
with Logix 5000 controllers. For full product compatibility information, see the Product
Compatibility and Download Center (PCDC) at rok.auto/pcdc.

IMPORTANT You must use adapter firmware version 3.011 or later with standard I/O
firmware version 2.011 and safety I/O modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 15

Chapter 1 FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Operation in a Logix 5000 Control System

Table 1 - FLEX 5000 I/O Standard and Safety Modules Controller Compatibility Requirements
Modules Controllers
CompactLogix 5380
Compact GuardLogix 5380
Standard Modules CompactLogix 5480
5094-IF8, 5094-IF8XT, 5094-IY8, 5094-IY8XT, 5094-OF8, 5094-OF8XT ControlLogix 5580
GuardLogix 5580
Safety Modules Compact GuardLogix 5380
5094-IRT8S, 5094-IRT8SXT GuardLogix 5580

Secure Access to the To secure access to the [device] by authorized users only, consider these options:
System • Password helps protect the source and execution of the control program
• Remove the key from the controller
• Implement physical barriers, such as locked cabinets

To secure access to the system, consider these options:

• Follow industry best practices to harden your personal computers and servers,
including anti-virus/anti-malware and application allow-list solutions.
The recommendations are published at the Rockwell Automation technical support
center in Knowledgebase Technote Rockwell Automation Customer Hardening Guidelines.
• Develop and deploy backup and disaster recovery policies and procedures. Test
backups on a regular schedule.
• Minimize network exposure for all control system devices and systems, and confirm
that they are not accessible from the Internet.
• Locate control system networks and devices behind firewalls and isolate them from the
business network.
• Subscribe to the Knowledgebase Technote Industrial Security Advisory Index, so you
have access to information about security matters that affect Rockwell Automation
products.

Follow recommended network practices for products with network interfaces, such as
communication ports or web servers. These practices help minimize risk or exposure by
unauthorized activity or users. For more information, see:
• Converged Plantwide Ethernet (CPwE) Design and Implementation Guide, publication
ENET-TD001
• EtherNet/IP Network Devices User Manual, publication ENET-UM006
• Configure System Security Features User Manual, publication SECURE-UM001

Types of Analog I/O Table 2 describes the types of FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules.
Modules Table 2 - FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Modules
Applies to these modules: Cat. No. Description
5094 Standard I/O Modules 5094-IF8, 5094-IF8XT 8-channel current/voltage input modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules 5094-IY8, 5094-IY8XT 8-channel current/voltage/RTD/Thermocouple input modules
5094-OF8, 5094-OF8XT 8-channel current/voltage output modules
5094-IRT8S, 5094-IRT8SXT 8-channel RTD/Thermocouple safety input modules

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 1 FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Operation in a Logix 5000 Control System

Module Overview Figure 3 shows the parts of an example FLEX 5000 analog standard I/O module.

Figure 4 shows the parts of an example FLEX 5000 analog safety I/O module.
Figure 3 - Example FLEX 5000 Analog Standard I/O Module
2 3

FLEX 5000 I/O

®
POWER STATUS

5094-IF8 ANALOG 8 INPUT 2 1 TB3

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 3 4 5

FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Parts

Item Description
Status indicators - Displays the status of communication, module health, and input/
1 output devices. Indicators help with troubleshooting anomalies.
Release lever - Disengages the latching hooks to allow removal of the module from the
2 terminal base assembly.
Module keying - Indicates the keying position the terminal base assembly must be
3 configured to before installing the module.
4 Terminal base - Indicates the type of terminal base assembly to use with the module.
5 Latching hooks - Securely installs FLEX 5000 modules on the terminal base assembly.

Figure 4 - Example FLEX 5000 Analog Safety I/O Module

2 3

FLEX 5000 I/O

®
POWER STATUS

5094-IRT8S SAFETY RTD/TC 8 INPUT 3 4 TB3IT

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 3 4 5

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 17

Chapter 1 FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Operation in a Logix 5000 Control System

FLEX 5000 I/O System Power

FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules receive the following power types:
• System-side power that powers the system and lets modules transfer data and execute
logic. System-side power is also known as Backplane power.
• Field-side power that powers field-side devices that are connected to some FLEX 5000
I/O modules. Field-side power is also known as SA power.

ATTENTION: Power to this equipment and all connected I/O must be

supplied from a source that is isolated from Mains power via an approved
isolating transformer constructed with basic insulation.

System-side power begins at the FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapter and passes across the
FLEX 5000 module internal circuitry via terminal base power bus, that is, Backplane power.

Field-side power, that is, SA power begins at the first terminal base assembly and can be daisy
chained to the next terminal base assembly on the right. You can also install a separate field-
side power source to each terminal base assembly.

For more information on how to power FLEX 5000 modules, see FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP
Adapter User Manual, publication 5094-UM005.
SA Power Requirements

Take note of the following when supplying SA power to your system:

• You must limit the SA field-side power source to 10 A, max, at 18...32V DC.
• Confirm that the external module power supply is adequately sized for the total module
power bus current draw in the system.
For example, if the total module power current draw, including current inrush
requirements, is 5 A, you can use a module power supply that is limited to 5 A.
• You must use SELV-listed power supplies for module power if there are functional
safety modules that are connected to the FLEX 5000 I/O family.
• Not all power supplies are certified for use in all applications, for example,
nonhazardous and hazardous environments.

IMPORTANT We recommend that you use separate external power supplies for the
adapter and the adjacent terminal base. This practice can prevent
unintended consequences that can result if you use one supply.

Ownership Every I/O module in a Logix 5000 control system must be owned by a controller, also known as
the owner-controller. When the FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules are used in a Logix 5000 control
Applies to these modules: system, the owner-controller performs the following:
5094 Standard I/O Modules • Stores configuration data for every module that it owns.
5094 Safety I/O Modules
• Can reside in a location that differs from the FLEX 5000 I/O modules.
• Sends the I/O module configuration data to define module behavior and begin operation
in the control system.

Each FLEX 5000 I/O module must continuously maintain communication with its owner-
controller during normal operation.

Typically, each I/O module in a FLEX 5000 I/O system has only one owner-controller. Output
modules are limited to one owner-controller.

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 1 FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Operation in a Logix 5000 Control System

Configure the Modules You must create a Studio 5000 Logix Designer application project for the Logix 5000 controller
that owns the FLEX 5000 I/O modules. The project includes module configuration data for the
Applies to these modules: FLEX 5000 I/O modules.
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application transfers the project to the owner-controller
during the program download. Data is then transferred to the FLEX 5000 I/O modules over the
EtherNet/IP network.

The FLEX 5000 I/O modules can operate immediately after receiving and applying the
configuration data.

Connections for Standard During module configuration, you must define the module. Among the Module Definition
parameters, you must choose a connection type for the module. A connection is a real-time
Analog I/O Modules data transfer link between the owner-controller and the module that occupies the slot that the
Applies to these modules: configuration references.
5094 Standard I/O Modules
When you download module configuration to a controller, the controller attempts to establish a
connection to each module in the configuration.

Because part of module configuration includes a slot in the FLEX 5000 I/O system, the owner-
controller checks for the presence of a module there. If a module is detected, the owner-
controller sends the configuration. One of the following occurs:
• If the configuration is appropriate to the module detected, a connection is made and
operation begins.
• If the configuration is not appropriate to the module detected, the data is rejected and
the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application indicates that an error occurred.
The configuration can be inappropriate for many reasons. For example, a mismatch in
electronic keying that helps prevents normal operation.

The owner-controller monitors its connection with a module. Any break in the connection, for
example, the loss of power to the FLEX 5000 I/O system, causes a fault. The Studio 5000 Logix
Designer application monitors the fault status tags to indicate when a fault occurs on a
module.

Connection Types Available with Standard Analog I/O Modules

When configuring a FLEX 5000 analog I/O module, you must define the module. Connection is a
required parameter in the Module Definition. The choice determines what data is exchanged
between the owner-controller and the module.

Table 3 describes the connection types that you can use with FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules.

Table 3 - Connections - FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Modules

Description
Connection Type
FLEX 5000 Analog Input Modules FLEX 5000 Analog Output Modules
The module returns the following to the owner-controller: The module returns the following to the owner-controller:
Data • General fault data • General fault data
• Input data • Output data
The module returns the following to the owner-controller: The module returns the following to the owner-controller:
• General fault data • General fault data
Data with Calibration
• Input data • Output data
• Calibration data • Calibration data
When a Listen Only data connection is used, another controller owns the module.
A controller that makes a Listen Only connection to the module does not write configuration for the module. It merely listens to the
data exchanged with the owner-controller.
Listen Only IMPORTANT: If a controller uses a Listen Only connection, the connection must use the Multicast option.
For more information on Listen Only connections, see Listen Only Mode on page 24. In this case, all other connections to the
module, for example, the connection to the owner-controller must also use the Multicast option.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 19

Chapter 1 FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Operation in a Logix 5000 Control System

Data Types Available with Standard Analog I/O Modules

The Module Definition includes a Data parameter that matches the module type. Analog input
modules use Input Data, and analog output modules use Output Data.

The available Data parameter choices are as follows:

• Analog input modules - The Input Data choice is always Analog Data.
• Analog output modules - The Output Data choices are Analog Data or None. The Output
Data choice None is only available if you choose the Connection parameter Listen Only.

For more information on the Connection and Data parameter choices available with FLEX 5000
I/O modules, see the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.

Requested Packet Interval

The Requested Packet Interval (RPI) is a configurable parameter that defines a specific rate at
which data is exchanged between the owner-controller and the module.

You set the RPI value during initial module configuration and can adjust it as necessary after
module operation has begun. Valid RPI values are 0.2…750 ms.

IMPORTANT If you change the RPI while the project is online, the connection to the
module is closed and reopened in one of the following ways:
• You inhibit the connection to the module, change the RPI value, and
uninhibit the connection.
• You change the RPI value. In this case, the connection is closed and
reopened immediately after you apply the change to the module
configuration.

For more information on guidelines for specifying RPI rates, see the Logix 5000 Controllers
Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM094.

Connections for Safety

Analog I/O Modules IMPORTANT This section shows some Studio 5000 Logix Designer application
screens that are used when you configure FLEX 5000 I/O safety
Applies to these modules:
modules. For a complete description of how to configure the modules,
5094 Safety I/O Modules see Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules on page 91.

During module configuration, you must define the module. Among the Module Definition
parameters with FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules, you must choose how module is configured.

The choice depends on whether the project is downloaded to the controller that owns the
module configuration, that is, the owner-controller, or to a controller that is listening to input
modules in a project.

A real-time data transfer link is established between the controller and the module that
occupies the slot that the configuration references.

When you download module configuration to a controller, the controller attempts to establish a
connection to each module in the configuration.

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 1 FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Operation in a Logix 5000 Control System

Because part of module configuration includes a slot number in the remote FLEX 5000 I/O
system, the owner-controller checks for the presence of a module there. If a module is
detected, the owner-controller sends the configuration. One of the following occurs:
• If the configuration is appropriate to the module detected, a connection is made and
operation begins.
• If the configuration is not appropriate to the module detected, the data is rejected and
the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application indicates that an error occurred.
The configuration can be inappropriate for many reasons. For example, a mismatch in
electronic keying that helps prevents normal operation.
The owner-controller monitors its connection with a module. Any break in the connection, for
example, the loss of power to a remote FLEX 5000 I/O system, causes a fault. The Studio 5000
Logix Designer application monitors the fault status tags to indicate when a fault occurs on a
module.

‘Configured By’ Options Available for Safety Analog I/O Modules

The ‘Configured By’ choice determines what data is exchanged between the owner-controller
and the module. This is an example Module Definition dialog box, and available Connection
choices, for FLEX 5000 I/O safety modules.

Table 4 describes the connection types that you can use with FLEX 5000 I/O safety modules.
Table 4 - Configured By Choices - FLEX 5000 Safety I/O Modules
Description
Configured by Choice
FLEX 5000 Safety Input Module
The module returns the following to the owner-controller:
This controller General fault data
Safety input data
When the External Means option is chosen, another controller owns the module.
A controller that chosen this option does not write configuration for the module. It
External means merely listens to the data exchanged with the owner-controller. That is, it receives
Safety input data.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 21

Chapter 1 FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Operation in a Logix 5000 Control System

Requested Packet Interval

The valid RPI values for FLEX 5000 I/O safety modules are 2…500 ms.

IMPORTANT • For standard applications, you can change the RPI while the project is
online.
• For safety applications, you can change the RPI while the project is
online only if the safety application does not have a generated safety
signature. If the safety application has a generated safety signature,
you cannot change the RPI while the project is online.
• Safety output connection RPI is configured via the Safety task period.
The safety task period cannot be set to values outside of the 2 ms to
500 ms range.
If you change the RPI while the project is online, however, the
connection to the module is closed and reopened in one of the
following ways:
• You inhibit the connection to the module, change the RPI value, and
uninhibit the connection.
• You change the RPI value. In this case, the connection is closed and
reopened immediately after you apply the change to the module
configuration.
Connection Reaction Time Limit

Setting the RPI on FLEX 5000 I/O safety modules is not as straightforward as setting it on FLEX
5000 I/O standard modules. With FLEX 5000 I/O safety modules, the Connection Reaction Time
Limit configuration affects the RPI that is used for a module.

The Connection Reaction Time Limit defines the predicted period of safety packets on the
associated connection. If the Max Network Delay exceeds the Connection Reaction Time Limit,
a connection fault occurs.

By default, the Connection Reaction Time Limit is four times the RPI for safety input
connection. Use the default values for Timeout Multiplier (2) and Network Delay Multiplier
(200). The Network Delay Multiplier value is in terms of percentage. Thus, 200 means 200%.

IMPORTANT To determine what is appropriate, analyze each safety channel. The

default Timeout Multiplier of 2 and Network Delay Multiplier of 200
creates a worst-case input connection reaction time limit of 4 times
the RPI, and an output connection reaction time limit of 3 times the RPI.
Changes to these parameters must be approved only after a thorough
review by a safety administrator.
For more information on specifying RPI rates, see the following:
• FLEX 5000 I/O safety I/O modules - Safety Category on page 95
• Logix 5000 Controllers Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication
1756-RM094

Connection Over an During module configuration, you must configure the Connection over EtherNet/IP parameter.
The configuration choice dictates how input data is broadcast over the network.
EtherNet/IP Network
Applies to these modules: The FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules use one of the following methods to broadcast data:
5094 Standard I/O Modules • Multicast - Data is sent to all network devices in a multi-cast group
5094 Safety I/O Modules • Unicast - Data is sent to a specific controller depending on the module configuration
Unicast is the default setting. We recommend that you use Unicast because it reduces
network bandwidth usage.

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 1 FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Operation in a Logix 5000 Control System

Input Module Operation Logix 5000 controllers do not poll the FLEX 5000 analog input modules for input data. Instead,
the input modules send their input data, that is channel and status data, at the RPI.
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules FLEX 5000 analog input modules reside in a FLEX 5000 I/O system that is accessible to a Logix
5094 Safety I/O Modules 5000 controller over an EtherNet/IP network. A FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapter is the first
component in a FLEX 5000 I/O system and connects the system to the EtherNet/IP network.

FLEX 5000 analog input modules communicate input data to the FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP
adapter at the defined RPI. The input data consists of channel and status data.

At the RPI, the following events occur.

1. The remote analog input module scans its channels for input data.
2. The module sends the data to the FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapter.
3. The FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapter in the FLEX 5000 I/O system sends the data over
the EtherNet/IP network.
4. One of the following:
- If the controller is directly connected to the EtherNet/IP network, it receives the
input data immediately.
- If the controller is connected to the EtherNet/IP network through another
communication module, the module sends the data to its backplane and the
controller receives it.

Output Module Operation The controller sends data to an output module at the RPI or after an Immediate Output (IOT)
instruction is executed.
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules The RPI defines when the controller sends data to the FLEX 5000 analog output module and
when the output module echoes data.
At the RPI, not only does the controller send data to the output module, but also the output
module sends data to the controller. For example, the output module sends an indication of
the channel data quality.

FLEX 5000 analog output modules reside in a FLEX 5000 I/O system that is accessible to a
Logix 5000 controller over an EtherNet/IP network. A FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapter is the
first component in a FLEX 5000 I/O system and connects the system to the EtherNet/IP
network.
FLEX 5000 analog output modules receive output data from a controller. The output module
also sends data to the controller.
Controller to Remote Analog Output Module Data Transmission

The controller broadcasts data to its local backplane at one of the following:
• RPI
• An IOT instruction is executed.

IMPORTANT An IOT instruction sends data to all output modules in the

system immediately, and resets the RPI timer.

Based on the RPI rate and the length of the controller program scan, the output module can
receive and echo data multiple times during one program scan.

When the RPI is less than the program scan length, the output channels can change values
multiple times during a program scan. The owner-controller does not depend on the program
scan to complete to send data.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 23

Chapter 1 FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Operation in a Logix 5000 Control System

These events occur when the controller sends data to a FLEX 5000 output module.
1. Data is sent in one of the following ways:
- If the controller is directly connected to the EtherNet/IP network, it broadcasts data
to the network.
In this case, skip to step 3.
- If the controller is connected to the EtherNet/IP network via a communication
module, the controller transmits the data to the backplane.
In this case, proceed to step 2.
2. The EtherNet/IP communication module transmits the data to the EtherNet/IP network.
3. The FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapter in the FLEX 5000 I/O system receives the data from
the network and transmits it to the backplane.
4. The analog output module receives the data from the backplane and behaves as
dictated by its configuration.
Remote Analog Output Module to Controller Data Transmission

When a FLEX 5000 analog output module receives new data and the requested data value is
present on the RTB, the output module sends, or ‘echoes’, a data value back to the controller
and to the rest of the control system. The data value corresponds to the signal present at its
terminals. This feature is called Data Echo.

In addition to the Data Echo, the output module sends other data to the controller at the RPI.
For example, the module alerts the controller if a short circuit condition exists on the module.

The following events occur when a remote FLEX 5000 analog output module sends data to the
controller at the RPI.
1. The module sends the data to the backplane.
2. The FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapter in the FLEX 5000 I/O system sends the data over
the EtherNet/IP network.
3. One of the following:
- If the controller is directly connected to the EtherNet/IP network, it receives the
input data from the network without need for a communication module.
- If the controller is connected to the EtherNet/IP network through another
communication module, the module transmits the data to its backplane and the
controller receives it.

Listen Only Mode Any controller in the system can listen to the data from an I/O module. An owner-controller, as
described in Ownership on page 18, exchanges data with analog I/O modules.
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules Other controllers can use a Listen Only connection with the analog I/O module. In this case, the
‘listening’ controller can only listen to input data or ‘echoed’ output data. The listening
controller does not own the module configuration or exchange other data with the module.

During the I/O configuration process, you can specify a Listen Only connection. For more
information on Connection options, see Module Definition on page 80.

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 1 FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Operation in a Logix 5000 Control System

IMPORTANT Remember the following:

• If a controller uses a Listen Only connection, the connection must use
the Multicast option. In this case, all other connections to the module,
for example, the connection of the owner-controller, must also use the
Multicast option.
• If a controller attempts to use a Listen Only connection to a module but
the owner-controller connection uses the Unicast option, the attempt at
a Listen Only connection fails.
The ‘Listen Only’ controller receives data from the module as long as a
connection between an owner-controller and module is maintained.
• If the connection between an owner-controller and the module is
broken, the module stops sending data and connections to all ‘listening
controllers’ are also broken.

Protected Operations To maintain the secure operation of your FLEX 5000 analog I/O module, operations that can
disrupt module operation are restricted based on the module operating mode. Table 5
describes the restrictions.

Table 5 - Protected Operations on FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Modules

Activity

Current Module Operation Firmware Module Connection or Electronic

Module Reset Calibration Connection Configuration
Update Data Format Keying RPI Change
Request Request Change
Request Request(2) Change Change
Connection not running Accepted
Connection running Rejected Accepted(3) Accepted(4) Not allowed(5) Accepted(6)
Firmware update is in process Rejected
Calibration is in process Accepted(1)
(1) The module accepts the requests and changes listed. Keep in mind, when the request or change is made, the calibration process is automatically aborted. We recommend that you wait for
the module calibration to finish before attempting any of the requests or changes.
(2) When the request is made through the Module Properties dialog box.
(3) Only requests for Listen Only connections are accepted.
(4) Configuration change is accepted in the following scenarios:
- Changes are made in the Module Properties dialog box and you click Apply.
- Changes are made in the Configuration tags and you send a Reconfigure Module MSG to the module.
(5) The difference between Rejected and Not allowed is that rejected activities can be attempted in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application but do not take effect. The activities that are not
allowed, that is, attempts to change the Connection or Data Format used, do not occur in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
For example, if you attempt to reset a module that is connected to the owner-controller, the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application executes the request and alerts you that it was rejected.
If you attempt to change the data format on a module that is connected to an owner-controller, the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application does not execute the attempted change. The
application only alerts you that the change is not allowed. In the case, if the change is attempted online, the Module Definition dialog box field that changes the data format is disabled.
(6) The change occurs after the connection is closed and reopened. You can close and reopen the connection in the following ways:
- Change the project while it is offline and download the updated project before going online again.
- Change the project while it is online and click Apply or OK in the Module Properties dialog box. In this case, before the change is made, a dialog box alerts you of the ramifications before
the change is made.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 25

Chapter 1 FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Module Operation in a Logix 5000 Control System

Notes:

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 2
Common Analog I/O Module Features
This chapter describes module features that are available on all FLEX 5000 analog I/O
modules. FLEX 5000 analog input modules convert an analog signal to a digital value. For
example, the modules can convert the following:
• Volts
• Millivolts
• Milliamps
• Ohms

FLEX 5000 analog output modules convert a digital value to an analog signal. For example, the
modules can convert the following:
• Volts
• Milliamps

FLEX 5000 RTD/Thermocouple modules convert Ohms or mV input analog signals into digital
values.

Rolling Timestamp of Data The rolling timestamp is a continuously running 15-bit rolling timestamp that counts in
milliseconds from 0…32,767 ms.
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules The rolling timestamp value is reported in the I.Chxx.RollingTimestamp tag for the FLEX 5000
5094 Safety I/O Modules analog I/O modules.

Rolling Timestamp with the 5094-IF8 and 5094-IY8, and 5094-IRT8S

Modules
Typically, the FLEX 5000 analog input modules scan their inputs at the RPI. Standard modules
also updates the rolling timestamp data at the RPI. The 5094-IRT8S module produces data on
input RPI. Scanning and rolling time stamp update depends on the safety configuration.

The controller program uses the last two rolling timestamp values to calculate the amount of
time between the samples.

A system time change can cause a slight change in input sample timing. The rolling timestamp
accurately reflects the change.

There can be jitter in the timing between samples before and after the system time change.

Rolling Timestamp with the 5094-OF8 Module

For the FLEX 5000 analog output modules, the rolling timestamp value is updated only when
new values are applied to the Digital to Analog Converter (DAC).

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 27

Chapter 2 Common Analog I/O Module Features

Floating Point Data Format The FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules return channel data to the controller in the IEEE 32-bit
floating point data format. In your Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, the data type is
Applies to these modules: REAL.
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules The floating point data format lets you change the data representation of the selected
channel. Although the full range of the module does not change, you can scale your module to
represent I/O data in specific terms for your application.

For more information on using scaling, see page 32.

Calibration The FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules use precise analog components that maintain their
specifications over time. The modules are calibrated via the following methods:
Applies to these modules:
• Factory calibration when the modules are built.
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules
• User-executed calibration.

For more information on how to calibrate a module:

• For 5094 standard I/O modules see Calibrate the Modules on page 109.
• For 5094 safety I/O modules see Calibrate a Safety Analog I/O Module on page 100.

Module Data Quality The FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules indicate the quality of channel data that is returned to the
owner-controller. Data quality represents accuracy. Levels of data quality are reported via
Reporting module input tags.
Applies to these modules:
We recommend that you monitor the tags in your program to make sure that the application is
5094 Standard I/O Modules
operating as expected with accurate channel input data.
5094 Safety I/O Modules
IMPORTANT • For Standard modules: Once the condition that causes the Fault or
Uncertain tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to
0. The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application controls the tags. You
cannot change the status of the tags. Keep in mind that in some system
configurations, the tag is not reset immediately after the condition is
removed. The tag typically resets after a small delay.
• For Safety Input modules, see: Reset FLEX 5000 safety I/O Modules to
Out-of-Box State on page 74 and Fault and Status Reporting on page 60.

The following inputs indicate the level of data quality.

• I.Chxx.Fault - This tag indicates that the reported channel data is inaccurate and cannot
be trusted for use in your application. Do not use the reported channel data for control.
You must troubleshoot the module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
Example causes of inaccurate data include the following:
- Channel is disabled
- Open Wire condition (input modules)
- No Load condition (output modules)
- Underrange/Overrange condition
- Short Circuit condition (Standard modules only)
- Field Power Loss condition
- Discrepancy Check Failure (Safety modules only)
We recommend that you troubleshoot the module for the typical causes first.
• I.Chxx.Uncertain - This tag indicates that the reported channel data can be inaccurate
but the degree of inaccuracy is unknown. We recommend that you do not use the
reported channel data for control.

IMPORTANT Safety Consideration

You must monitor the uncertain bit on Safety modules.

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 2 Common Analog I/O Module Features

If the tag is set to 1, you know that the data can be inaccurate. You must troubleshoot
the module to discover what degree of inaccuracy exists.
Example causes of uncertain data include the following:
- Data signal outside the channel operating range
- Module is out of operating temperature range.
- Invalid sensor offset value
- Calibration fault on the channel
- For Standard modules, calibration is in process on the channel. Active calibration
process on one channel can cause an indication of Uncertain data quality on other
module channels simultaneously.

Calibration Causes Uncertain Data Quality Indication on Input Module

Applies to these modules: Groups
5094 Standard I/O Modules
When a channel on a FLEX 5000 analog input module is being calibrated, the Notch Filter
setting for that channel changes to 5 Hz. This results in the I.Chxx.Uncertain tag being set to 1
for that channel until calibration is completed.
Grouped inputs share an Analog-to-Digital converter. As a result when any input channel is in
the calibration process, the I.Chxx.Uncertain tag is set to 1 for the other input channels in that
group. This setting is because the data sampling rate slows for all input channels in the group.

The Notch Filter settings for the other input channels in the group remain the same.

Software Configurable You use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application to configure the module, monitor system
operation, and troubleshoot issues. You can also use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Applies to these modules: application to retrieve the following information from any module in the system:
5094 Standard I/O Modules • Serial number
5094 Safety I/O Modules
• Firmware revision information
• Product code
• Vendor
• Error and fault information
• Diagnostic information

By minimizing the need for tasks, such as setting hardware switches and jumpers, the
software makes module configuration easier and more reliable.

Fault and Status Reporting The FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules report fault and status data along with channel data. Fault
and status data is reported in the following ways:
Applies to these modules:
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer application
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules
• Module status indicators

IMPORTANT Do not use the module status indicators or I/O status indicators on
FLEX 5000 I/O safety modules for safety operations.
For more information on fault reporting, see the individual module feature chapters and
Troubleshoot Your Module on page 119.

Module Inhibiting Module inhibiting lets you indefinitely suspend a connection, including Listen Only
connections, between a controller and an analog I/O module without removing the module
Applies to these modules: from the configuration. This process lets you temporarily disable the connection a module,
5094 Standard I/O Modules such as to perform maintenance.
5094 Safety I/O Modules
IMPORTANT You cannot inhibit a connection when the safety controller is safety-
locked or a safety signature exists for the controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 29

Chapter 2 Common Analog I/O Module Features

ATTENTION: Safety Consideration

If you inhibit the I/O module from going to the Safety State when it detects
a loss in communication to the network or the controller, you are
responsible for making sure that your application has other means to
maintain a safe state
You can use module inhibiting in the following ways:
• You write a configuration for an I/O module but inhibit the module to help prevent it
from communicating with the owner-controller. The owner does not establish a
connection and the configuration is not sent to the module until the connection is
uninhibited.
• In your application, a controller already owns a module, has downloaded the
configuration to the module, and is exchanging data over the connection between the
devices.
In this case, you can inhibit the module and the connection to the module is closed.

IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module that is ProgMode

enabled, it enters Program mode, and all outputs change to the
state configured for Program mode.
For example, if an output module is configured so that the state
of the outputs transition to zero during Program mode,
whenever that module is inhibited, outputs transition to zero.

You can use module inhibiting in these instances:

• You want to update an analog I/O module, for example, update the module firmware
revision. Use the following procedure.
a. Inhibit the module.
b. Perform the update.
c. Uninhibit the module.

IMPORTANT For the 5094-IRT8S module, it is recommended to wait for 2 to 3

minutes after the firmware upgrade, before you Uninhibit the module.
• You use a program that includes a module that you do not physically possess yet. You
do not want the controller to look for a module that does not yet exist. In this case, you
can inhibit the module in your program until it physically resides in the proper slot.

To see where to inhibit a FLEX 5000 analog I/O module, see page 80.

Electronic Keying Electronic Keying reduces the possibility that you use the wrong device in a control system. It
compares the device that is defined in your project to the installed device. If keying fails, a
Applies to these modules: fault occurs. These attributes are compared.
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules Attribute Description
Vendor The device manufacturer.
Device Type The general type of the product, for example, analog I/O module.
Product Code The specific type of the product. The Product Code maps to a catalog number.
Major Revision A number that represents the functional capabilities of a device.
Minor Revision A number that represents behavior changes in the device.

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 2 Common Analog I/O Module Features

The following Electronic Keying options are available.

Keying Option Description
Lets the installed device accept the key of the device that is defined in the project when the
installed device can emulate the defined device. With Compatible Module, you can typically
replace a device with another device that has the following characteristics:
Same catalog number
Same or higher Major Revision
Compatible Module Minor Revision as follows:
If the Major Revision is the same, the Minor Revision must be the same or higher.
If the Major Revision is higher, the Minor Revision can be any number.
Non-XT and XT version as follows:
You can use an XT version of the module in place of a non-XT module.
You cannot use a non-XT version of the module in place of an XT module.
Indicates that the keying attributes are not considered when attempting to communicate
with a device. With Disable Keying, communication can occur with a device other than the
type specified in the project.
ATTENTION: Be extremely cautious when using Disable Keying; if used incorrectly, this
Disable Keying option can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
We strongly recommend that you do not use Disable Keying.
If you use Disable Keying, you must take full responsibility for understanding whether the
device being used can fulfill the functional requirements of the application.
IMPORTANT: This option is not available for Safety modules.
Indicates that all keying attributes must match to establish communication. If any attribute
Exact Match
does not match precisely, communication with the device does not occur.

Carefully consider the implications of each keying option when selecting one.

IMPORTANT Changing Electronic Keying parameters online interrupts connections

to the device and any devices that are connected through the device.
Connections from other controllers can also be broken.
If an I/O connection to a device is interrupted, the result can be a loss
of data.
For more detailed information on Electronic Keying, see Electronic Keying in Logix 5000
Control Systems Application Technique, publication LOGIX-AT001.

Producer/Consumer FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules use the Producer/Consumer communication model to produce
data without a controller polling them first. The modules produce the data and controllers
Communication consume it. That is, the owner-controller and controllers with a Listen Only connection to the
module can consume it.

When an input module produces data, the controllers can consume the data simultaneously.
Simultaneous data consumption eliminates the need for one controller to send the data to
other controllers.

IMPORTANT Keep in mind, only one controller can own the I/O module. The
FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules do not support multiple owners of the
same module.
Other controllers must use a Listen Only connection to the module.

Use CIP Sync Time with The following FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules use CIP Sync for timestamps:
I/O Modules • 5094-IF8, 5094-IF8XT
• 5094-IY8, 5094-IY8XT
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules
• 5094-IRT8S, 5094-IRT8SXT
5094 Safety I/O Modules • 5094-OF8, 5094-OF8XT

CIP Sync is a CIP implementation of the IEEE 1588 PTP (Precision Time Protocol). CIP Sync
provides accurate real-time (Real-World Time) or Universal Coordinated Time (UTC)
synchronization of controllers and devices that are connected over CIP networks. This
technology supports highly distributed applications that require timestamping, sequence of
events recording, distributed motion control, and increased control coordination.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 31

Chapter 2 Common Analog I/O Module Features

These modules are CIP Sync slave-only devices. There must be another module on the network
that functions as a master clock. For more information on how to use CIP Sync technology, see
the Converged Plantwide Ethernet (CPwE) Design and Implementation Guide, publication
ENET-TD001.

I/O modules can be used to capture timestamps. The advantage is that CIP Sync is system-
wide, so timestamp values are consistent across all modules in the system.

Alarm Latching When enabled, Alarm Latching lets you latch a module alarm in the set position once the alarm
is triggered. The alarm remains set even if the condition causing it to occur disappears, until
Applies to these modules: the alarm is unlatched.
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules Alarm latching is available on a per channel basis. You can latch the following alarms:
• Input modules - Process and Rate alarms
• Output modules - Clamp and Rate alarms

For more information on latching alarms on FLEX 5000 analog HART I/O modules, see the
module-specific chapters and:
• See Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules on page 75.
• See Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules on page 91.

Enable Latching
You can enable alarm latching in the following ways:
• Module Properties dialog box - To see where to latch alarms, see the following:
- Input modules - Alarms category
- Output modules - Limits category
For more information on how to use the Module Properties dialog box:
- See Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules on page 75.
- See Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules on page 91.
• Module tags - The alarm type determines which tag to change.
For more information on module tags and how to use them, see Module Tag Definitions
on page 129.

Unlatch Alarms

IMPORTANT Before you unlatch an alarm, make sure the condition that triggered
the alarm no longer exists
Once an alarm is latched, you must manually unlatch it. You can use the module tags to
unlatch an alarm. The alarm type determines which module tag to change.

For example, to unlatch a Low Low alarm on a FLEX 5000 analog input module, you set the
Chxx.LLAlarmUnlatch output tag to 1.
For more information on how to use the module tags, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.

Scaling When you scale a channel, you select two points that represent signal units, that is, a Low
Signal and a High Signal. You also select two points that represent engineering units, that is,
Applies to these modules: Low Engineering and High Engineering.
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules The Low Signal point equates to the Low Engineering point and the High Signal point matches
the High Engineering point.

IMPORTANT In choosing two points for the low and high value of your application,
you do not limit the range of the module. The module range remains
constant regardless of how you scale it.

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 2 Common Analog I/O Module Features

Scaling lets you configure the module to return data to the controller in signal units or in
engineering units (listed as Percent of Full Scale in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
application).
For example, if you use the 5094-IF8 module in Current mode with an input range of 4…20 mA,
consider the following:
• To receive values in signal units, configure the module as follows:
- Low Signal = 4 mA
- High Signal = 20 mA
- Low Engineering = 4 EU
- High Engineering = 20 EU
• To receive values in Percent of Full Scale, configure the module as follows:
- Low Signal = 4 mA
- High Signal = 20 mA
- Low Engineering = 0%
- High Engineering = 100%

The returned value is indicated in the I.Chxx.Data tag.

The following table shows values that can appear when using Percent of Full Scale.
Table 6 - Current Values Represented in Engineering Units
Current (mA) Engineering Units Value (%) Value in I.Chxx.Data Tag
0.0 -25.00 -25.00
3.0 -6.00 -6.00
4.0 0.0 0.00
12.0 50.0 50.0
20.0 100.0 100.0
23.0 118.75 118.75

You configure Scaling on the Chxx category in the Module Properties dialog box for each
module. For more information on using the Module Properties dialog box, see Configure
Standard Analog I/O Modules on page 75.

Data Offset The FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules support offset features that let you compensate for any
inaccuracy inherent to the input or output device connected to the channel. The offset value
Applies to these modules: adjusts the input or output data value.
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules The following channel offset features are available:
• Sensor Offset - Available on FLEX 5000 analog input modules.
For more information on using the Sensor Offset feature, see page 41 and page 56.
• Channel Offset - Available on FLEX 5000 analog output modules.
For more information on using the Channel Offset feature, see page 63.

Module Accuracy Module accuracy represents the module accuracy when its ambient temperature is the same
as the temperature at which the module was calibrated.
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules The following specifications are related to Module Accuracy:
5094 Safety I/O Modules • Absolute Accuracy at 25 °C (77 °F)
• Module Accuracy Drift with Temperature

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 33

Chapter 2 Common Analog I/O Module Features

Absolute Accuracy at 25 °C (77 °F)

This specification matches the temperature at which the module was calibrated in the factory
during manufacturing. FLEX 5000 analog input modules absolute accuracy when operating in
25 °C (77 °F) conditions = 0.05%. FLEX 5000 analog output modules absolute accuracy when
operating in 25 °C (77 °F) conditions = 0.10%.

The level of module accuracy remains the same, whether it is operating in Current (mA),
Voltage (V), RTD, or Thermocouple mode. The 5094-IY8 and 5094-IRT8S modules support the
RTD or Thermocouple modes.

Module Accuracy Drift with Temperature

Module Accuracy Drift with Temperature represents the error that occurs if the module’s
ambient temperature changes for every degree change. That is, from -40…+70 °C
(-40…+158 °F).
The module accuracy drift with temperature varies by module and the mode being used. The
following table lists module accuracy drift values:
Module Accuracy Drift with
Cat. No. Mode Temperature
Voltage (V) 28 ppm/°C
5094-IF8
Current (mA) 47 ppm/°C
Voltage (V) 28 ppm/°C
Current (mA) 24 ppm/°C
5094-IY8
RTD 60 ppm/°C
Thermocouple/millivolt 15 ppm/°C
Voltage (V) 47 ppm/°C
5094-OF8
Current (mA) 60 ppm/°C
RTD 36 ppm/°C
5094-IRT8S
Thermocouple/millivolt 26 ppm/°C

Module Firmware The FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules are manufactured with module firmware installed. If
updated module firmware revisions are available in the future, you can update the firmware.
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules Updated firmware revisions are made available for various reasons, for example, to correct an
5094 Safety I/O Modules anomaly that existed in previous module firmware revisions.
You access updated firmware files at the Rockwell Automation Product Compatibility and
Download Center (PCDC). A link to the PCDC is available at rok.auto/pcdc.
At the PCDC, you can use the module catalog number to check for firmware updates. If the
catalog number is not available, no updates exist then.

Verify that the firmware revision of the FLEX 5000 I/O modules that you use is correct before
commissioning the system.

IMPORTANT Only download firmware and access product release notes from the
Product Compatibility and Download Center (PCDC) at rok.auto/pcdc.
Do not download firmware from non-Rockwell Automation sites.

For safety consideration for the 5094-IRT8S module see Safety Considerations for Module
Firmware on page 70.

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 3
5094-IF8 Analog Input Module Features
The 5094-IF8 input module has eight single-ended, non-isolated channels. Each channel
supports connection to the following input types:
• Current
• Voltage

IMPORTANT Remember the following:

• This module also has features that apply to all FLEX 5000 analog I/O
modules that are described in Common Analog I/O Module Features on
page 27.
• You can configure the features that are described in this chapter with
the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
For more information on how to configure the module, see Configure
Standard Analog I/O Modules on page 75.

Multiple Input Ranges The 5094-IF8 module supports multiple input ranges. The input type that you choose during
module configuration determines the available input ranges. An input type is chosen on a
channel-by-channel basis.
Table 7 - Input Ranges
Input Type Available Input Range
0…20 mA
Current (mA) 4…20 mA
-10…10V
Voltage (V) 0…5V
0…10V

To see where to choose an input range for the 5094-IF8 module, see page 82.

Notch Filter The Notch Filter is a built-in feature of the Analog-to-Digital converter (ADC) that removes line
noise in your application. The removal of line noise is also known as noise immunity.

The Notch Filter attenuates the input signal at the specified frequency.

Choose a Notch Filter based on what noise frequencies are present in the module operating
environment and any sampling requirements that are needed for control. For example if the
Notch Filter setting is 60 Hz, 60 Hz AC line noise and its overtones are filtered out.

The following Notch Filter settings are available on a 5094-IF8 module:

• 5 Hz
• 10 Hz
• 15 Hz
• 20 Hz
• 50 Hz
• 60 Hz
• 100 Hz
• 200 Hz
• 500 Hz
• 1000 Hz

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 35

Chapter 3 5094-IF8 Analog Input Module Features

• 2500 Hz
• 5000 Hz
• 10000 Hz
• 15625 Hz
• 25000 Hz
• 31250 Hz
• 62500 Hz

If you want to filter lower frequency noise, you get a slower input sample rate.

To see where to choose a notch filter for the 5094-IF8 module, see page 82.
Relationship between Notch Filter Settings and RPI Setting

There is a relationship between a Notch Filter setting and the RPI rate.
• If you want greater noise suppression at the selected Notch Filter frequency and
improved resolution, you use a slower input sample rate.
For example, if you choose the 60 Hz notch filter setting and need better noise
suppression and resolution, the recommended module minimum RPI is 60 ms.
• If you want a faster input sample rate at the selected Notch Filter frequency, the noise
suppression and resolution is lesser.
Using the previous example, if you choose the 60 Hz notch filter setting and need faster
input sampling, the recommended module minimum RPI is 20 ms.

In Table 8, each Notch Filter setting has two recommended minimum module RPI values that
allow the required time to collect samples from each channel. One setting provides faster
sample speed and the other provides slightly better resolution at slower sample speeds.
Table 8 - Notch Filter and Recommended Minimum Module RPI Values - Effect on Noise Rejection
Recommended Minimum Module RPI Value
Application With All Channels Enabled and Using the Same Notch
Notch Filter Application That is Configured With Only One Channel Enabled Filter Setting on All Channels
Faster Sampling Speed Better Noise Rejection Faster Sampling Speed Better Noise Rejection
5 Hz 211 ms 631 ms 750 ms(1) N/A
10 Hz 106 ms 316 ms 422 ms N/A
15 Hz 64 ms 190 ms 254 ms N/A
20 Hz 53 ms 158 ms 212 ms 632 ms
50 Hz 22 ms 64 ms 86 ms 254 ms
60 Hz (default) 18 ms 53 ms 72 ms 212 ms
100 Hz 11 ms 32 ms 44 ms 127 ms
200 Hz 5.6 ms 16.1 ms 22.2 ms 65 ms
500 Hz 2.5 ms 6.7 ms 9.6 ms 26.5 ms
1000 Hz 1.4 ms 3.5 ms 5.4 ms 13.8 ms
2500 Hz 0.8 ms 1.6 ms 2.9 ms 6.2 ms
5000 Hz 0.6 ms 1 ms 2 ms 3.7 ms
10000 Hz 0.5 ms 0.7 ms 1.6 ms 2.4 ms
15625 Hz 0.5 ms 0.6 ms 1.6 ms 2 ms
25000 Hz 0.4 ms 0.5 ms 1.5 ms 1.7 ms
31250 Hz 0.4 ms 0.5 ms 1.5 ms 1.6 ms
62500 Hz 0.4 ms 0.4 ms N/A 1.4 ms
(1) If you use the 5 Hz Notch Filter setting with four or more channels, the input data cannot be refreshed at every RPI, even if the maximum RPI allowed is used. Instead, fresh data is delivered
approximately every other RPI.

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 3 5094-IF8 Analog Input Module Features

Noise Rejection When Using Different Notch Filter Selections

When input channels on the same module use different Notch Filter selections, you must
consider the sample time for each channel. This helps you to find the recommended RPI that
provides enough time for sampling all channels.

The eight input channels on the 5094-IF8 module are grouped into two groups. Channels
00…03 are grouped, and channels 04…07 are grouped. When you determine the recommended
minimum module RPI value, remember:
• The recommended minimum module RPI value when channels use different Notch Filter
selections is determined by group.
The recommended minimum RPI rates for all enabled channels are added together. If
any channel in the other group is enabled, the recommended minimum RPI rate for each
enabled channel is increased by 0.2 ms.
• If the groups have different recommended minimum RPI values, use the higher RPI
value when you configure the module.

Table 9 lists the values in an application that needs a faster sampling rate.
Table 9 - Example Application That Requires Faster Sampling Speed
Channel Recommended Minimum Module Recommended Minimum Module RPI
Channel Notch Filter Recommended Minimum Module RPI
Group RPI for Each Channel (1) to Use in Module Configuration
Ch00 50 Hz 21.6 ms
Grouped Ch01 1000 Hz 1.6 ms
28.3 ms
together Ch02 - Disabled N/A N/A
Ch03 62500 Hz 0.6 ms
72.2 ms
Ch04 60 Hz 18.2 ms
Grouped Ch05 60 Hz 18.2 ms
72.2 ms
together Ch06 60 Hz 18.2 ms
Ch07 60 Hz 18.2 ms
(1) The values in this column represent the corresponding recommended minimum RPI value listed in Table 8 with an additional 0.2 ms added to it because at least one channel is enabled in
the other group.

Table 10 lists the values in an application that needs better noise rejection.
Table 10 - Example Application That Requires Better Noise Rejection
Channel Recommended Minimum Module Recommended Minimum Module RPI
Channel Notch Filter Recommended Minimum Module RPI
Group RPI for Each Channel(1) to Use in Module Configuration
Ch00 50 Hz 63.6 ms
Grouped Ch01 1000 Hz 3.8 ms
67.8 ms
together Ch02 - Disabled N/A N/A
Ch03 62500 Hz 0.6 ms
212.2 ms
Ch04 60 Hz 53.2 ms
Grouped Ch05 60 Hz 53.2 ms
212.2 ms
together Ch06 60 Hz 53.2 ms
Ch07 60 Hz 53.2 ms
(1) The values in this column represent the corresponding recommended minimum RPI value listed in Table 8 with an additional 0.2 ms added to it because at least one channel is enabled in
the other group.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 37

Chapter 3 5094-IF8 Analog Input Module Features

Digital Filter The Digital Filter is a first-order lag filter. It smooths input data noise transients on each input
channel. This value specifies the time constant for a digital, first-order lag filter on the input.
The input is 63% of the step change after the first time constant elapses.
120

100

80

Amplitude % 60

40

20

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2

Time in Seconds

The filter value is specified in units of milliseconds. A value of 0 (zero) disables the filter. The
digital filter equation is as shown.

∆ t * (Xn - Yn-1)
Yn = Yn-1 +
∆ t + TA

Yn = Present Output, Filtered Peak Voltage (PV)

Yn-1 = Previous Output, Filtered PV

∆ t = Module Channel Update Time (seconds)

TA = Digital Filter time Constant (seconds)
Xn= Present Input, Unfiltered PV

IMPORTANT Remember the following:

• Digital Filter input data changes only when new input data is collected.
• If an Overrange or Underrange condition is detected before the Digital
Filter input data is collected, the condition is indicated immediately.
An immediate indication also applies to the Fault data for the input.

To see where to choose a digital filter for the 5094-IF8 module, see page 82.

Underrange/Overrange Underrange/Overrange Detection detects when the 5094-IF8 module is operating beyond
limits set by the input range.
Detection
The module can read input signal levels outside the low and high signal values for each input
range. The signal limits to which the module can read are thresholds. Only when the signal is
beyond a threshold is an underrange or overrange condition that is detected and indicated.

For example, if you configure a 5094-IF8 module channel to use the + 10V input range, an
overrange condition does not exist until the input signal exceeds 12V.

Table 11 lists the input ranges of the 5094-IF8 module and the thresholds in each range before
the module detects an underrange/overrange condition.

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 3 5094-IF8 Analog Input Module Features

Table 11 - Input Signal Threshold Ranges

Deadband
Input Type Range Underrange Threshold Overrange Threshold
Example(1)
0…20 mA < -0.07 mA
Current (mA) > 23.00 mA 0.07 mA
4…20 mA < 3 mA(2)
±10.00V < -12.00V >12.00V 0.04V
Voltage (V) 0…5V < -0.02V > 6.00V 0.02V
0…10V < -0.04V > 12.00V 0.04V
(1) The module has alarm deadband values for each range. The deadband lets a condition remain set despite it disappearing. For
example, if a module uses a Current input type in the 4…20 mA range and the signal value goes below 3 mA, the underrange
condition is triggered. Because of the 0.07 mA deadband, the condition is not cleared until the signal value reaches 3.07 mA.
For more information on Alarm Deadbands, see page 40.
(2) Underrange is set at < 3 mA, but the I:Chxx.Data tag reports values as low as 0.0 mA. The condition is clamped when the signal
reaches 3 mA.

IMPORTANT The Disable All Alarms feature, does not disable the underrange/
overrange detection feature.
The Disable All Alarms feature disables alarms on the module.
Underrange/Overrange detection is not an alarm. It is an indicator that
channel data has gone beyond the absolute maximum or minimum,
respectively, for the channel range.
To disable the Underrange/Overrange detection feature, you must
disable the channel.

Underrange/overrange conditions are indicated when the following tags change to 1:

• I.Chxx.Underrange
• I.Chxx.Overrange

For more information on how to use the module tags, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.

Process Alarms Process alarms alert you when the module has exceeded configured high or low limits for
each channel. The following are the user-configurable, alarm trigger points:
• High high
• High
• Low
• Low low

To use the Process Alarms, you must complete the following tasks:
• Enable the alarms
• Configure the trigger points
Enable Process Alarms

When the module tags are created, the Process Alarm tags are disabled by default.

To see where to enable Process Alarms for the 5094-IF8 module, see page 83.
Configure Alarm Trigger Points

You must configure the Process Alarm with a trigger point. That is, set values in Engineering
Units that, once the signal reaches the value, the alarm is triggered.

Process Alarm trigger points are related to the Scaling parameters that you configure for the
channel. The Engineering Units that are established in Scaling determine the Process Alarm
trigger points. That is, the available trigger point values can be in signal units or engineering
units.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 39

Chapter 3 5094-IF8 Analog Input Module Features

For example, consider a channel that uses the Current (mA) input type, the 4 mA…20 mA input
range, and scales the High and Low Engineering values of 100 and 0, respectively. The
available Process Alarm values range from 0…100.
In this case, if the High Limit alarm is set to 50 EU, when the input signal reaches 12 mA, the
High Limit alarm is set. The alarm is set because Scaling was configured for Percentage of Full
Scale and a signal value of 12 mA is 50% of the full scale of engineering units.

To see where to set the Process Alarm trigger points for the 5094-IF8 module, see page 83.
Latch Alarms

Check Latch Process Alarms on the Alarms category to latch the process alarms. To see where
to see where to latch Process Alarms on the 5094-IF8 module, see page 83.
Unlatch Alarms

IMPORTANT Before you unlatch an alarm, make sure the condition that triggered the
alarm no longer exists.
Once an alarm is latched, you must manually unlatch it. To unlatch an alarm, change the output
tag for that alarm.
For example, change the O.Chxx.LAlarmUnlatch tag for the low alarm that you want to unlatch
from 0 to 1.

IMPORTANT After an alarm is unlatched, change the tag back from 1 to 0.

You must change the tag from 0 to 1 to unlatch the alarm each time it is
triggered.
If you do not change the tag back to 0 and the alarm is latched again in
the future, the alarm remains latched despite the Unlatch tag value
being 1.

For more information on how to use the module tags, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.
Alarm Deadband

You can configure an alarm deadband to work with these alarms. The deadband lets the
process alarm status bit remain set, despite the alarm condition disappearing, as long as the
input data remains within the deadband of the process alarm.

The following graphic shows input data that sets each of the four alarms at some point during
module operation. In this example, latching is disabled; therefore, each alarm turns Off when
the condition that caused it to set ceases to exist.

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 3 5094-IF8 Analog Input Module Features

Figure 5 - Alarm Deadband Alarm Settings

High high alarm turns On. High high alarm turns Off.
High alarm remains On. High alarm remains On.

High high
High alarm High alarm turns Off.
turns On.
High

Normal Input Range

Low alarm turns On. Low alarm turns Off.

Low Alarm Deadbands

Low low

Low low alarm turns On. Low low alarm turns Off.
Low alarm remains On. Low alarm remains On.

To see where to set the Alarm Deadband on the 5094-IF8 module, see page 83.

Rate Alarm The Rate Alarm defines the maximum rate of change between input samples in Engineering
Units per second. If the Rate Alarm Limit is exceeded, the I.Chxx.RateAlarm tag set to 1.
You can enable Rate Alarm latching. To see where to enable the Rate Alarm latching on the
5094-IF8 module, see page 83.

Once the Rate Alarm is latched, you must change the O.Chxx.RateAlarmUnlatch tag to 1.
You can unlatch the alarm at any point in the system operation. If you change the unlatch tag
to 1 and the triggering condition remains, the alarm is immediately latched again.
We suggest that you unlatch the Rate Alarm only after the rate of change between input
samples has returned below the Rate Alarm Limit value.

Sensor Offset The Sensor Offset compensates for any known error on the sensor or channel to which the
sensor is connected. The value is set in signal units and is added to the data value.
For example, consider an application that uses the Current (mA) input type with the 4…20 mA
range and scaling at 0…100%. If a sensor has an error and the channel consistently reports
current signal values by 0.2 mA lower than the actual value, you must set Sensor Offset to
1.25%.

You must use the O.Chxx.SensorOffset tag to set the Sensor Offset. In the example above, the
O.Chxx.SensorOffset tag = 1.25.

For more information on how to use the module tags, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.

Open Wire Detection Open Wire Detection detects when a wire is disconnected from the channel. You must enable
Open Wire Detection in the module configuration.

To see where to enable Open Wire Detection on the 5094-IF8 module, see page 82.

Table 12 describes the results of an Open Wire condition occurring when the module is
operating in each mode.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 41

Chapter 3 5094-IF8 Analog Input Module Features

Table 12 - Open Wire Conditions

Mode Cause of Detection Resulting Module Behavior
The input signal for a channel is
below 100 µA. Input data for the channel changes to a specific scaled value corresponding to the Underrange value for
IMPORTANT: This feature is the channel’s Input Range.
Current (mA) available in Current mode only The I:Chxx.OpenWire tag changes to 1.
when the channel uses the 4…20 A fault occurs and the I:Chxx.Fault tag is set to 1.
mA input range.
Input data for the channel changes to a specific scaled value corresponding to the Overrange value for the
The input signal value reaches full channel’s Input Range.
Voltage scale of the input range used. The I:Chxx.OpenWire tag changes to 1.
A fault occurs and the I:Chxx.Fault tag is set to 1.

IMPORTANT The Disable All Alarms feature, does not disable the Open Wire Detection feature. The Disable All Alarms
feature disables all alarms on the module.
The Open Wire Detection feature is not an alarm. It is an indicator that a wire has been disconnected from the
channel but does not trigger an alarm.
To disable the Open Wire Detection feature, you must clear the Open Wire Detection checkbox in the module
configuration.

Over Temperature The Over Temperature Detection feature indicates that the temperature of the conditions
within which the module is operating are higher than the module operating limits.
Detection
When an Over Temperature condition exists, the I.Chxx.OverTemperature tag is set to 1.

Field Power Loss Detection The Field Power Loss Detection feature monitors for the loss of power at an input module
channel. When field power to the module is lost, a channel-level fault is sent to the controller
to identify the exact channel faulted.

Field Power Loss Detection has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program
if a fault occurs. For information on modules, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.

To see where to enable or disable field power detection, see page 81.

Fault and Status Reporting The 5094-IF8 module sends fault and status data with channel data to the owner-controller
and listening controllers. The data is returned via module tags that you can monitor in your
Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.

With some exceptions, the 5094-IF8 module provides the fault and data status in a
channel-centric format. The tag names in the following table that include Chxx represent
channel-centric data. The xx represents channel number.
Table 13 - 5094-IF8 Module - Fault and Status Data Tags
Data Type Tag Name Triggering Event That Sets the Tag
(1) The owner-controller loses its connection to the module.
ConnectionFaulted
Chxx.Fault The channel data quality is bad.
The following conditions:
The channel uses a Voltage input type in any input range and the input signal value reaches full scale.
Chxx.OpenWire The channel uses a Current input type in only the 4…20 mA input range and the input signal goes below
Fault 100 µA.
The input signal at the channel is below 100 µA.
Chxx.Underrange The channel data is beneath the absolute minimum for this channel.
Chxx.Overrange The channel data is above the absolute maximum for this channel.
Chxx.OverTemperature The module is at a higher temperature than its rated operating limits.

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 3 5094-IF8 Analog Input Module Features

Table 13 - 5094-IF8 Module - Fault and Status Data Tags (Continued)

Data Type Tag Name Triggering Event That Sets the Tag
(1) The module is in Run Mode.
RunMode
DiagnosticActive Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics threshold is reached.
A counter that increments when a diagnostic condition occurs or goes away. The counter is a rolling
DiagnosticSequenceCount counter that skips 0 on rollovers.
Chxx.Uncertain The channel data can be imperfect but it is not known to what degree of inaccuracy.
Chxx.FieldPowerOff Field power is not present on the channel.
Chxx.NotANumber The most recently received data value was not a number.
The following conditions exist:
The I.Chxx.Data tag value is less than the C.Chxx.LLAlarmLimit tag value or the alarm is latched.
Chxx.LLAlarm The O.Chxx.LLAlarmEn tag is set.
Alarms are enabled for the channel.
The following conditions exist:
The I.Chxx.Data tag value is less than the C.Chxx.LAlarmLimit tag value or the alarm is latched.
Chxx.LAlarm The O.Chxx.LAlarmEn tag is set.
Alarms are enabled for the channel.
Status The following conditions exist:
The I.Chxx.Data tag value is greater than the C.Chxx.HAlarmLimit tag value or the alarm is latched.
Chxx.HAlarm The O.Chxx.HAlarmEn tag is set.
Alarms are enabled for the channel.
The following conditions exist:
The I.Chxx.Data tag value is greater than the C.Chxx.HHAlarmLimit tag value or the alarm is latched.
Chxx.HHAlarm The O.Chxx.HHAlarmEn tag is set.
Alarms are enabled for the channel.
The following conditions exist:
The absolute change between consecutive channel samples exceeds the C.Chxx.RateAlarmLimit tag
Chxx.RateAlarm value or the alarm is latched.
The O.Chxx.RateAlarmEn tag is set.
Alarms are enabled for the channel.
Chxx.Data The channel data in scaled Engineering Units.
A continuously running, 15-bit timer that counts in milliseconds and is not related to CIP Sync.
Whenever a module scans its channels, it records the value of RollingTimestamp then. The controller
Chxx.RollingTimestamp program uses the last two rolling timestamp values to calculate the amount of time between the
samples.
(1) This tag provides module-wide data and affects all channels simultaneously.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 43

Chapter 3 5094-IF8 Analog Input Module Features

Notes:

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 4
Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing
(5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple
(5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features
The 5094-IY8 input module has eight single-ended and differential, non-isolated channels. The
5094-IRT8S input module has four isolated groups of two, non-isolated channels.

Each channel supports connection to the following input types:

Input Type 5094-IY8 5094-IRT8S
Current Yes No
Voltage Yes No
RTD Yes Yes
Thermocouple Yes Yes

Differential inputs have a greater resistance to the effects of electromagnetic noise and
provide improved flexibility regarding cable length when wiring your module.

IMPORTANT Remember the following:

• This module also has features that apply to all FLEX 5000 analog I/O
modules that are described in Common Analog I/O Module Features on
page 27.
• You can configure the features that are described in this chapter with
the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
For more information on how to configure standard modules, see
Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules on page 75.
For more information on how to configure safety modules, see
Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules on page 91.

Multiple Input Ranges The modules offer multiple input ranges. The input type that you choose during module
configuration determines the available input ranges.
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules For the RTD input type, the sensor type that you choose determines the available input ranges.
5094 Safety I/O Modules The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application automatically sets the Input Range to the valid
setting after you select a sensor type.

Table 14 describes the available module input ranges.

Table 14 - 5094-IY8 and 5094-IRT8S Module - Channel Input Ranges
Input Type 5094-IY8 Support 5094-IRT8S Support Sensor Type Available Input Ranges
One of the following:
Current (mA) Yes No N/A • 0…20 mA
• 4…20 mA
One of the following:
• -10…10V
Voltage (V) Yes No N/A
• 0…5V
• 0…10V

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 45

Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

Table 14 - 5094-IY8 and 5094-IRT8S Module - Channel Input Ranges (Continued)

Input Type 5094-IY8 Support 5094-IRT8S Support Sensor Type Available Input Ranges
One of the following:
• 1…500 Ω
Ohm • 2…1000 Ω
• 4…2000 Ω
• 8…4000 Ω
100 Ω PT 385 1…500 Ω
200 ΩPT 385 2…1000 Ω
500 Ω PT 385 4…2000 Ω
1000 Ω PT 385 8…4000 Ω
100 Ω PT 3916 1…500 Ω
RTD Yes Yes
200 Ω PT 3916 2…1000 Ω
500 Ω PT 3916 4…2000 Ω
1000 Ω PT 3916 8…4000 Ω
10 Ω CU 427 1…500 Ω
120 Ω NI 672 1…500 Ω
100 Ω NI 618 1…500 Ω
120 Ω NI 618 1…500 Ω
200 Ω NI 618 2…1000 Ω
500 Ω NI 618 4…2000 Ω
Thermocouple Yes Yes mV -100…+100 mV
Any Thermocouple Type Yes Yes Any Thermocouple type -78…+78 mV

To see where to choose an input range:

• For the 5094-IY8 module, see page 84.
• For the 5094-IRT8S module, see page 97.

Notch Filter The Notch Filter is a built-in feature of the Analog-to-Digital converter (ADC) that removes line
noise in your application. The removal of line noise is also known as noise immunity.
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules The Notch Filter attenuates the input signal at the specified frequency.
5094 Safety I/O Modules
Choose a Notch Filter based on what noise frequencies are present in the module operating
environment and any sampling requirements that are needed for control. For example if the
Notch Filter setting is 60 Hz, 60 Hz AC line noise and its overtones are filtered out.

These Notch Filter settings are available on the modules:

Notch Filter Settings
Notch Filter 5094-IY8 Support 5094-IRT8S Support
5 Hz Yes Yes
10 Hz Yes Yes
15 Hz Yes No
20 Hz Yes Yes
50 Hz Yes Yes
60 Hz Yes Yes
100 Hz Yes Yes
200 Hz Yes Yes
500 Hz Yes Yes
1000 Hz Yes Yes
2500 Hz Yes Yes
5000 Hz Yes Yes
10000 Hz Yes Yes
15625 Hz Yes No

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

Notch Filter Settings (Continued)

Notch Filter 5094-IY8 Support 5094-IRT8S Support
25000 Hz Yes No
31250 Hz Yes No
62500 Hz Yes No

If you want to filter lower frequency noise, you get a slower input sample rate.

To see where to choose a notch filter:

• For the 5094-IY8 module, see page 84.
• For the 5094-IRT8S module, see page 97.

Relationship between Notch Filter Settings and RPI Setting (5094-IY8

Only)
There is a relationship between a Notch Filter setting and the RPI rate.
• If you want greater noise suppression at the selected Notch Filter frequency and
improved resolution, you use a slower input sample rate.
• If you want a faster input sample rate at the selected Notch Filter frequency, the noise
suppression and resolution is lesser.

In Table 15, each Notch Filter setting has two recommended minimum module RPI values that
allow the required time to collect samples from each channel. One setting provides faster
sample speed and the other provides slightly better resolution at slower sample speeds.
Table 15 - Notch Filter and Recommended Minimum Module RPI Values - Effect on Noise Rejection
Recommended Minimum Module RPI Value
Application With All Channels Enabled and Using the Same Notch
Notch Filter Application That is Configured With Only One Channel Enabled Filter Setting on All Channels
Faster Sampling Speed Better Noise Rejection Faster Sampling Speed Better Noise Rejection
5 Hz 215 ms 635 ms 750 ms(1) N/A
10 Hz 110 ms 320 ms 440 ms N/A
15 Hz 65 ms 195 ms 260 ms N/A
20 Hz 60 ms 165 ms 240 ms 660 ms
50 Hz 25 ms 70 ms 100 ms 280 ms
60 Hz (default) 20 ms 60 ms 80 ms 240 ms
100 Hz 15 ms 35 ms 60 ms 140 ms
200 Hz 10 ms 20 ms 40 ms 80 ms
500 Hz 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 40 ms
1000 Hz 2 ms 5 ms 8 ms 20 ms
2500 Hz 1.5 ms 2.5 ms 6 ms 10 ms
5000 Hz 1 ms 2 ms 4 ms 8 ms
10000 Hz 0.8 ms 1 ms 3.2 ms 4 ms
15625 Hz 0.8 ms 0.9 ms 3.2 ms 3.5 ms
25000 Hz(2) 0.8 ms 0.8 ms 3.2 ms 3.2 ms
31250 Hz(2) 0.8 ms 0.8 ms 3.2 ms 3.2 ms
62500 Hz(2) N/A 0.7 ms N/A 2.8 ms
(1) If you use the 5 Hz Notch Filter setting with four channels, the input data cannot be refreshed at every RPI, even if the maximum RPI allowed is used. Instead, fresh data is delivered
approximately every other RPI.
(2) Not supported by 5094-IRT8S modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 47

Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

Considerations When Using Different Notch Filter Selections

(5094-IRT8S only)
When input channels on the same module use different Notch Filter selections, you must
consider the sample time for each channel. This helps you to find the recommended RPI that
provides enough time for sampling all channels.
Table 16 - Conversion Time Table
Notch Filter Conversion Time (ms)
5 Hz 322
10 Hz 302
20 Hz 152
50 Hz 62
60 Hz 52
100 Hz 28
200 Hz 18
500 Hz 8
1000 Hz 6
2500 Hz 4
5000 Hz 2
10,000 Hz 2

Table 17 - Resolution vs. Notch Filter

RTD 500 Ohm RTD 1000 Ohm RTD 2000 Ohm RTD 4000 Ohm
TC/mV Range Range Range Range
Notch Filter Resolution Resolution Resolution Resolution Resolution
(bits) (bits) (bits) (bits) (bits)
5 Hz 17 17 16 16 16
10 Hz 17 17 16 16 16
20 Hz 16 16 16 16 15
50 Hz 16 16 15 15 14
60 Hz 16 16 15 15 14
100 Hz 15 15 15 14 14
200 Hz 15 15 14 14 13
500 Hz 14 14 14 13 13
1000 Hz 14 14 13 13 12
2500 Hz 13 13 13 12 11
5000 Hz 11 11 10 10 9
10,000 Hz 9 9 8 8 6

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

Digital Filter The Digital Filter is a first-order lag filter. It smooths input data noise transients on each input
channel. This value specifies the time constant for a digital, first-order lag filter on the input.
Applies to these modules: The input is 63% of the step change after the first time constant elapses.
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules
120

100

80

Amplitude % 60

40

20

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2

Time in Seconds

The filter value is specified in units of milliseconds. A value of 0 (zero) disables the filter. The
digital filter equation is as shown.

∆ t * (Xn - Yn-1)
Yn = Yn-1 +
∆ t + TA

Yn = Present Output, Filtered Peak Voltage (PV)

Yn-1 = Previous Output, Filtered PV

∆ t = Module Channel Update Time (seconds)

TA = Digital Filter time Constant (seconds)
Xn = Present Input, Unfiltered PV

IMPORTANT Remember the following:

• Digital Filter input data changes only when new input data is collected.
• If an Overrange or Underrange condition is detected before the Digital
Filter input data is collected, the condition is indicated immediately. An
immediate indication also applies to the Fault data for the input.

To see where to choose a digital filter:

• For the 5094-IY8 module, see page 84.
• For the 5094-IRT8S module, see page 97.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 49

Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

Underrange/Overrange Underrange/Overrange Detection detects when the module is operating beyond limits set by
the input range.
Detection
Applies to these modules: The module can read input signal levels outside the low and high signal values for each input
range. The signal limits to which the module can read are thresholds. Only when the signal is
5094 Standard I/O Modules
beyond a threshold is an underrange or overrange condition that is detected and indicated.
5094 Safety I/O Modules
For example, if you configure a 5094-IY8 module channel to use the + 10V input range, an
overrange condition does not exist until the input signal exceeds 12V.

Table 18 lists the input ranges of the 5094-IY8 and 5094-IRT8S modules and the thresholds in
each range before the module detects an underrange/overrange condition.
Table 18 - Input Type Underrange/Overrange Thresholds
Range - Current and
Voltage Input Type Deadband
Sensor Type - RTD and Underrange Overrange
Input Type
Thermocouple Input Threshold Threshold Example(1)
Type
0…20 mA < -0.07 mA
Current (mA)(2) > 23.00 mA 0.07 mA
4…20 mA < 3 mA(3)
±10.00V < -12.00V >12.00V 0.04V
Voltage (V)(2) 0…5V < -0.02V > 6.00V 0.02V
0…10V < -0.04V > 12.00V 0.04V
< -200 °C > 870 °C
< -328 °F > 1598 °F
Pt385 < 73 °K > 1143 °K
< 132 °R > 2058 °R
< -200 °C > 630 °C
< -328 °F > 1166 °F
Pt3916 < 73 °K > 903 °K
< 132 °R > 1626 °R
< -200 °C > 260 °C
< -328 °F > 500 °F
RTD(4) Cu427 < 73 °K > 533 °K N/A
< 132 °R > 960 °R
< -80 °C > 320 °C
< -112 °F > 608 °F
Ni672 < 193 °K > 593 °K
< 348 °R > 1068 °R
< -60 °C > 250 °C
< -76 °F > 482 °F
Ni618 < 213 °K > 523 °K
< 384 °R > 942 °R
< 21 °C > 1820 °C
< 68 °F > 3308 °F
B < 293 °K > 2093 °K
< 528 °R > 3768 °R
< 0.00 °C > 2315 °C
< 32 °F > 4199 °F
C < 273 °K > 2588 °K
< 492 °R > 4659 °R
< -270 °C > 1000 °C
< -454 °F > 1832 °F
Thermocouple E N/A
< 3 °K > 1273 °K
< 6 °R > 2292 °R
< -210 °C > 1200 °C
< -346 °F > 2192 °F
J < 63 °K > 1473 °K
< 114 °R > 2652 °R
< -270 °C > 1372 °C
< -454 °F > 2502 °F
K < 3 °K > 1645 °K
< 6 °R > 2961 °R

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

Table 18 - Input Type Underrange/Overrange Thresholds (Continued)

Range - Current and
Voltage Input Type Deadband
Sensor Type - RTD and Underrange Overrange
Input Type
Thermocouple Input Threshold Threshold Example(1)
Type
< -270 °C > 1300 °C
< -454 °F > 2372 °F
N < 3 °K > 1573 °K
< 6 °R > 2832 °R
< -50 °C > 1768 °C
< -58 °F > 3215 °F
R < 223 °K > 2041 °K
< 402 °R > 3674 °R
< -50 °C > 1768 °C
< -58 °F > 3215 °F
S < 223 °K > 2041 °K
Thermocouple < 402 °R > 3674 °R
N/A
(continued) < -270 °C > 400 °C
< -454 °F > 752 °F
T < 3 °K > 673 °K
< 6 °R > 1212 °R
< -200 °C > 800 °C
< -328 °F > 1472 °F
TXK/XK(L) < 73 °K > 1073 °K
< 132 °R > 1932 °R
< 0.00 °C > 2315 °C
< 32 °F > 4199 °F
D < 273 °K > 2588 °K
< 492 °R > 4659 °R
(1) The module has alarm deadband values for each range. The deadband lets a condition remain set despite it disappearing. For
example, if a module uses a Current input type in the 4…20 mA range and the signal value goes below 3 mA, the underrange
condition is triggered. Because of the 0.07 mA deadband, the condition is not cleared until the signal value reaches 3.07 mA.
For more information on Alarm Deadbands, see page 53.
(2) 5094-IY8 module only.
(3) Underrange is set at < 3 mA, but the I:Chxx.Data tag reports values as low as 0.0 mA. The condition is clamped when the signal
reaches 3 mA.
(4) For two-wire, the cable length contributes to the inaccuracy of the results. You should consider the accuracy of the sensor
separately.

IMPORTANT The Disable All Alarms feature, does not disable the underrange/
overrange detection feature.
The Disable All Alarms feature disables alarms on the module.
Underrange/Overrange detection is not an alarm. It is an indicator that
channel data has gone beyond the absolute maximum or minimum,
respectively, for the channel range.
To disable the Underrange/Overrange detection feature, you must
disable the channel.
Underrange/overrange conditions are indicated when the following tags change to 1:
• I.Chxx.Underrange
• I.Chxx.Overrange

For more information on how to use the module tags, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.

Process Alarms Process alarms alert you when the module has exceeded configured high or low limits for
each channel. The following are the user-configurable, alarm trigger points:
Applies to these modules:
• High high
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules
• High
• Low
• Low low

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 51

Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

To use the Process Alarms, you must complete the following tasks:
• Enable the alarms
• Configure the trigger points
Enable Process Alarms

When the module tags are created, the Process Alarm tags are disabled by default.

To see where to enable Process Alarms:

• For the 5094-IY8 module, see page 85.
• For the 5094-IRT8S module, see page 98.
Configure Alarm Trigger Points

You must configure the Process Alarm with a trigger point. That is, set values in Engineering
Units that, once the signal reaches the value, the alarm is triggered.

Process Alarm trigger points are related to the Scaling parameters that you configure for the
channel. The Engineering Units that are established in Scaling determine the Process Alarm
trigger points. That is, the available trigger point values can be in signal units or engineering
units.

For example, consider a channel that uses the Current (mA) input type, the 4 mA…20 mA input
range, and scales the High and Low Engineering values of 100 and 0, respectively. The
available Process Alarm values range from 0…100.
In this case, if the High Limit alarm is set to 50 EU, when the input signal reaches 12 mA, the
High Limit alarm is set. The alarm is set because Scaling was configured for Percentage of Full
Scale and a signal value of 12 mA is 50% of the full scale of engineering units.

To see where to set the Process Alarm trigger points:

• For the 5094-IY8 module, see page 85.
• For the 5094-IRT8S module, see page 98.
Latch Alarms

Check Latch Process Alarms on the Alarms category to latch the process alarms.

To see where to latch Process Alarms:

• For the 5094-IY8 module, see page 85.
• For the 5094-IRT8S module, see page 98.
Unlatch Alarms

IMPORTANT Before you unlatch an alarm, make sure the condition that triggered the
alarm no longer exists.

Once an alarm is latched, you must manually unlatch it. To unlatch an alarm, change the output
tag for that alarm.

For example, change the O.Chxx.LAlarmUnlatch tag for the low alarm that you want to unlatch
from 0 to 1.

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

IMPORTANT After an alarm is unlatched, change the tag back from 1 to 0.

You must change the tag from 0 to 1 to unlatch the alarm each time it is
triggered.
If you do not change the tag back to 0 and the alarm is latched again in
the future, the alarm remains latched despite the Unlatch tag value
being 1.

For more information on how to use the module tags, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.
Alarm Deadband

You can configure an alarm deadband to work with these alarms. The deadband lets the
process alarm status bit remain set, despite the alarm condition disappearing, as long as the
input data remains within the deadband of the process alarm.

The following graphic shows input data that sets each of the four alarms at some point during
module operation. In this example, latching is disabled; therefore, each alarm turns Off when
the condition that caused it to set ceases to exist.
Figure 6 - Alarm Deadband Alarm Settings

High high alarm turns On. High high alarm turns Off.
High alarm remains On. High alarm remains On.

High high
High alarm High alarm turns Off.
turns On.
High

Normal Input Range

Low alarm turns On. Low alarm turns Off.

Low Alarm Deadbands

Low low

Low low alarm turns On. Low low alarm turns Off.
Low alarm remains On. Low alarm remains On.

To see where to set the Alarm Deadband:

• For the 5094-IY8 module, see page 85.
• For the 5094-IRT8S module, see page 98.

Rate Alarm The Rate Alarm defines the maximum rate of change between input samples in Engineering
Units per second. If the Rate Alarm Limit is exceeded, the I.Chxx.RateAlarm tag set to 1.
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules You can enable Rate Alarm latching.
5094 Safety I/O Modules
To see where to enable the Rate Alarm latching:
• For the 5094-IY8 module, see page 85.
• For the 5094-IRT8S module, see page 98.

Once the Rate Alarm is latched, you must change the O.Chxx.RateAlarmUnlatch tag to 1 to
unlatch.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 53

Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

You can unlatch the alarm at any point in the system operation. If you change the unlatch tag
to 1 and the triggering condition remains, the alarm is immediately latched again.

We suggest that you unlatch the Rate Alarm only after the rate of change between input
samples has returned below the Rate Alarm Limit value.

Sensor Types The modules support multiple sensor types with the available selections dictated by the input
type configuration.
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules Table 19 - Available Sensor Types
5094 Safety I/O Modules
Input Type Available Sensor Types
100 Ω PT 385
200 Ω PT 385
500 Ω PT 385
1000 Ω PT 385
100 Ω PT 3916
200 Ω PT 3916
500 Ω PT 3916
RTD 1000 Ω PT 3916
10 Ω CU 427
120 Ω NI 672
100 Ω NI 618
120 Ω NI 618
200 Ω NI 618
500 Ω NI 618
Thermocouple B, C, D, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, TXK/XK (L)

To see where to select a Sensor Type for a channel:

• For the 5094-IY8 module, see page 84.
• For the 5094-IRT8S module, see page 97.

Sensor Type Temperature Limits

The 5094-IY8 and 5094-IRT8S modules let you set temperature limits when the module uses
the RTD or Thermocouple input types.

The choices made during module configuration for the following parameters determine Sensor
Type temperature limits:
• Input Type
• Sensor Type
• Temperature Units

To see where to set the parameters that affect temperature limits:

• For the 5094-IY8 module, see page 84.
• For the 5094-IRT8S module, see page 97.

IMPORTANT When you make the configuration choices that are listed previously, the
Scaling parameters are automatically set on the Chxx category of
the Module Properties dialog box. They cannot be changed in the
software.
The Low Signal value equals the Low Engineering value. The High Signal
value equals the High Engineering value.

For example, you can configure a channel with the following parameters:
• Input Type = RTD
• Sensor Type = 120 ohms NI 672
• Input Range = 1 ohms to 500 ohms 3-wire
• Temperature Units = Celsius

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

In this case, the Scaling parameters are set as follows:

• Low Signal = -80.0 °C
Low Engineering = -80.0 °C
• High Signal = 320.0 °C
High Engineering = 320.0 °C

Table 20 lists temperature range limits on the modules.

Table 20 - Temperature Limits for RTD and Thermocouple Sensor Types
Input Type Sensor Type Temperature Range Limits
100 Ohm PT 385 -200…870 °C
200 Ohm PT 385 -328…1598 °F
500 Ohm PT 385 73…1143 °K
1000 Ohm PT 385 132…2058 °R
100 Ohm PT 3916 -200…630 °C
200 Ohm PT 3916 -328…1166 °F
500 Ohm PT 3916 73…903 °K
1000 Ohm PT 3916 132…1626 °R
-200…260 °C
-328…500 °F
RTD 10 Ohm CU 427 73…533 °K
132…960 °R
-80…320 °C
-112…608 °F
120 Ohm NI 672 193…593 °K
348…1068 °R
100 Ohm NI 618 -60…250 °C
120 Ohm NI 618 -76…482 °F
200 Ohm NI 618 213…523 °K
500 Ohm NI 618 384…942 °R
21…1820 °C
68…3308 °F
TC Type B 293…2093 °K
528…3768 °R
0…2315 °C
32…4199 °F
TC Type C 273…2588 °K
492…4659 °R
0…2315 °C
32…4199 °F
Thermocouple (mV) TC Type D 273…2588 °K
492…4659 °R
-270…1000 °C
-454…1832 °F
TC Type E 3…1273 °K
6…2292 °R
-210…1200 °C
-346…2192 °F
TC Type J 63…1473 °K
114…2652 °R

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 55

Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

Table 20 - Temperature Limits for RTD and Thermocouple Sensor Types (Continued)
Input Type Sensor Type Temperature Range Limits
-270…1372 °C
-454…2502 °F
TC Type K 3…1645 °K
6…2961 °R
-270…1300 °C
-454…2372 °F
TC Type N 3…1573 °K
6…2832 °R
-50…1768 °C
-58…3215 °F
TC Type R 223…2041 °K
Thermocouple (mV) 402…3674 °R
(continued) -50…1768 °C
-58…3215 °F
TC Type S 223…2041 °K
402…3674 °R
-270…400 °C
-454…752 °F
TC Type T 3…673 °K
6…1212 °R
-200…800 °C
-328…1472 °F
TC Type TXK/XK (L) 73…1073 °K
132…1932 °R

Sensor Offset The Sensor Offset compensates for any known error on the sensor or channel to which the
sensor is connected. The value is set in signal units and is added to the data value.
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules For example, consider an application that uses the Current (mA) input type with the 4…20 mA
5094 Safety I/O Modules range and scaling at 0…100%. If a sensor has an error and the channel consistently reports
current signal values by 0.2 mA lower than the actual value, you must set Sensor Offset to
1.25%.
You must use the O.Chxx.SensorOffset tag to set the Sensor Offset. In the example above, the
O.Chxx.SensorOffset tag = 1.25.

IMPORTANT A change in SensorOffset value will not trigger rate alarm.

WARNING: If the sensor offset is not set appropriately, the channel faults.

For more information on using module tags, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.

10 Ohm Copper Offset With 10 Ohm Copper Offset, you can compensate for a small offset error in a 10 ohm copper
RTD. The channel must be connected to the 10 Ohm CU 427 Sensor Type to use this feature.
Applies to these modules: The offset value is indicated in units of 0.01 Ohm.
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules For example, if the resistance of a copper RTD used with a channel is 9.74 Ω at 25 °C, the 10
Ohm Copper Offset lets you account for the error. You must set the 10 Ohm Copper Offset field
on the Configuration tab to -0.26 or by setting the C.Chxx.TenOhmOffset to -26.

To see where to set the 10 Ohm Copper Offset:

• For the 5094-IY8 module, see page 84.
• For the 5094-IRT8S module, see page 97.

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

Open Wire Detection Open Wire Detection detects when a wire is disconnected from the channel. You must enable
Open Wire Detection in the module configuration.
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules For the 5094-IRT8S module, open wire detection is always enabled. The value reported during
5094 Safety I/O Modules an Open Wire detection depends on the Diagnostics selection (min/max eng) on the channel
(see Chxx Category on page 97).

To see where to enable Open Wire Detection:

• For the 5094-IY8 module, see page 84.

Table 21 describes the results of an Open Wire condition occurring when the module is
operating in each mode.
Table 21 - Open Wire Conditions
5094-IY8 5094-IRT8S
Mode Cause of Detection Resulting Module Behavior
Support Support
The input signal for a channel is • Input data for the channel changes to a specific scaled value
below 100 µA. corresponding to the Underrange value for the channel’s Input Range.
Current (mA) Yes No IMPORTANT: This feature is available in • The I:Chxx.OpenWire tag changes to 1.
Current mode only when the channel uses
the 4…20 mA input range. • A fault occurs and the I:Chxx.Fault tag is set to 1.
• Input data for the channel changes to a specific scaled value
The input signal value reaches full scale corresponding to the Overrange value for the channel’s Input Range.
Voltage Yes No of the input range used. • The I:Chxx.OpenWire tag changes to 1.
• A fault occurs and the I:Chxx.Fault tag is set to 1.
• For the 5094-IY8 module, the input data for the channel changes to
the highest scaled temperature value associated with the selected
sensor type.
• For the 5094-IRT8S module, input data for the channel changes to the
RTD Yes Yes A wire is disconnected from the channel. highest or lowest scaled temperature value associated with the
selected sensor type based on the user selection.
• The I:Chxx.OpenWire tag changes to 1.
• The I.Chxx.Overrange tag may be set to 1.
• A fault occurs and the I:Chxx.Fault tag is set to 1.
• For the 5094-IY8 module, the input data for the channel changes to
the highest scaled temperature value associated with the selected
sensor type.
Thermocouple • For the 5094-IRT8S module, input data for the channel changes to the
with Sensor Type Yes Yes A wire is disconnected from the channel. highest or lowest scaled temperature value associated with the
= Any TC Type selected sensor type based on the user selection.
• The I:Chxx.OpenWire tag changes to 1.
• The I.Chxx.Overrange tag may be set to 1.
• A fault occurs and the I:Chxx.Fault tag may be set to 1.
• For the 5094-IY8 module, the input data for the channel changes to a
specific scaled value corresponding to the Overrange value for the
channel’s Input Range.
Thermocouple • For the 5094-IRT8S module, Input data for the channel changes to a
with Sensor Type Yes Yes A wire is disconnected from the channel. specific scaled value corresponding to the highest and lowest value
= mV for the channel’s Input Range.
• The I:Chxx.OpenWire tag changes to 1.
• The I.Chxx.Overrange tag may be set to 1.
• A fault occurs and the I:Chxx.Fault tag is set to 1.

IMPORTANT The Disable All Alarms feature, does not disable the Open Wire Detection feature. The Disable All Alarms feature
disables all alarms on the module.
The Open Wire Detection feature is not an alarm. It is an indicator that a wire has been disconnected from the channel
but does not trigger an alarm.
To disable the Open Wire Detection feature, you must clear the Open Wire Detection checkbox in the module
configuration.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 57

Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

Temperature Units You can use the following temperature units with the modules:
• Celsius
• Kelvin
• Fahrenheit
• Rankine
• Custom
Each channel is individually configurable for its temperature units. To see where to select the
temperature units for a channel:
• For the 5094-IY8 module, see page 84.
• For the 5094-IRT8S module, see page 97.

Over Temperature The Over Temperature Detection feature indicates that the temperature of the conditions
within which the module is operating is higher than the module operating limits.
Detection
Applies to these modules: For 5094 standard I/O modules, when an Over Temperature condition exists, the
I.Chxx.OverTemperature tag is set to 1.
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules For 5094 safety I/O modules, when an Over Temperature condition exists, OverTemperature is
set to 1 in the diagnostic assembly.

Critical Temperature The Critical Temperature Detection feature indicates that the temperature of the conditions
within which the module is operating is outside the module operating limits and can result in
Detection an immediate module failure.
Applies to these modules:
When a critical temperature condition exists, CriticalTemperature is set to 1 in the diagnostic
5094 Safety I/O Modules
assembly.

Field Power Loss Detection The Field Power Loss Detection feature monitors for the loss of power at an input module
channel. When field power to the module is lost, a channel-level fault is sent to the controller
Applies to these modules: to identify the exact channel faulted.
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules Field Power Loss Detection has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program
if a fault occurs. For information on modules, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.

Cold Junction The junction at which temperature is measured is the hot junction. The junction where the
thermocouple wire interfaces with copper are the cold junction. The transition from
Compensation thermocouple wire to copper typically happens at the RTB terminal.
Applies to these modules:
The thermoelectric effect alters the input signal and must be compensated for to measure
5094 Standard I/O Modules
temperatures accurately. To compensate the input signal from your module accurately, you
5094 Safety I/O Modules must use cold junction compensation to account for the increased voltage.

When using the 5094-IY8 or 5094-IRT8S module with a thermocouple input type, the channel
must account for the thermoelectric effect of a junction of the thermocouple field wires and
the terminal base (TB) assembly. The cold junction temperature should be within the valid
sensor range. You must also make sure that the configured thermocouple sensor operating
range includes the RTB ambient temperature.

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

IMPORTANT TBs are not included with your module and are not available for
purchase. TBs consists of a mounting base (MB) and removable
terminal block (RTB). You must purchase MBs and RTBs separately and
assemble them together.
You must use a cold junction compensation (CJC) RTB when a 5094-IY8
module uses a thermocouple input type. The CJC RTBs account for the
thermoelectric effect.
The following CJC RTBs are available for order for the 5094-IY8 module:
• 5094-RTB3T, 5094-RTB3TXT
• 5094-RTB3TS, 5094-RTB3TSXT
The following RTBs are available for order for the 5094-IRT8S:
• 5094-RTB3IT, 5094-RTB3ITXT
• 5094-RTB3ITS, 5094-RTB3ITSXT

Remote Cold Junction (5094-IY8 Only)

Remote cold junction means that cold junction sensor is mounted on a remote termination
block, rather than on the local terminal block of the input module.

When remote CJC is enabled for a channel, the embedded CJC in the channel is not used and
you can use another channel of the module as a remote CJC.

Only channels with input type as thermocouple can use other channels (the other channels can
be set as RTD or thermocouple) as a remote CJC.

For more information, see CJChxx.Remote on page 136.

Cold Junction Disable Option

You can disable cold junction compensation on your 5094-IY8 or 5094-IRT8S module. To see
where to disable cold junction compensation, see page 86.

Input SSV Switch Enable The 5094-IY8 has eight non-isolated differential inputs.
(5094-IY8 only) Select only when the channel is connected to a 2-wire current device. This shorts the analog
Applies to these modules: input channel and analog common ground to avoid the need to install an additional jumper
wire on the terminal. The channel will behave as a single-ended channel and the module will
5094 Standard I/O Modules
source current (maximum 25 A) to the device using the specific terminals marked 24V
(terminals 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 44, and 46).

Do not attempt to have the 5094-IY8 source current through Sensor Source Voltage (SSV) in
any other configurations.

The 5094-IY8 does not support 3-wire current or voltage devices. We recommend to use the
5094-IF8 if you need to connect to a 3-wire device. The 5094-IY8 only supports 4-wire current
or voltage devices that are using external power.

To see where to enable the Input SSV Switch on the 5094-IY8 module, see page 84.

Safety Input Fault Reset The I/O channel supports a module-level user-configurable ‘Latch Fault until reset via output
tag’ mode and recovers from these faults:
(5094-IRT8S only)
• Field Power Off Detection
Applies to these modules: • Open Wire Detection
5094 Safety I/O Modules
If disabled, the Safety State could be exited once the fault is no longer present.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 59

Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

‘Latch Fault until reset via output tag’ mode is Enabled

When Latch Fault… mode is Enabled, the I/O channel holds safety input fault indications until it
checks that the fault is removed. If the fault is removed, the channel clears the fault status
only upon detecting that the ResetFault in its consume assembly channel sees a rising edge.
‘Latch Fault until reset via output tag’ mode is Disabled

When Latch Fault… mode is Disabled (default), the I/O channel holds safety input fault
indications for 1 second until it checks if the fault is removed. If the fault is removed, the
channel clears the fault status.

ATTENTION: When disabled, the safe state could be exited once the fault is
no longer present. You are responsible for confirming compliance with the
applicable standards for the entire system. You must read, understand, and
fulfill the functional safety requirements of the standard applicable to your
safety application.

Recoverable and Unrecoverable Faults

List of recoverable and nonrecoverable faults for 5094-IRT8S safety module:
TC/RTD CJC
Fault Type
Recoverable Note Recoverable Note
Underrange Y Autorecovery as soon as possible. Y Autorecovery as soon as possible.
Overrange Y Autorecovery as soon as possible. Y Autorecovery as soon as possible.
Open Wire Y Recovery behavior depends on FaultResetMode(1) Y Autorecovery as soon as possible.
Field Power Off Y Recovery behavior depends on FaultResetMode(1) Y Autorecovery as soon as possible.
Other faults N Module power cycle is required. N Module power cycle is required.
(1) For more information, see ‘Latch Fault until reset via output tag’ mode is Enabled

Fault and Status Reporting The 5094-IY8 and 5094-IRT8S modules send fault and status data with channel data to the
owner-controller and listening controllers. The data is returned via module tags that you can
Applies to these modules: monitor in your Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules With some exceptions, the modules provide the fault and data status in a channel-centric
format. The tag names in Table 22 and Table 23 that include Chxx represent channel-centric
data. The xx represents channel number.
Table 22 - Module Fault Tags
Type Tag Name Event
(1) The owner-controller loses its connection to the module.
ConnectionFaulted
Chxx.Fault The channel data quality is bad.
CJChxx.Fault The cold junction data quality is bad.
The following conditions:
5094-IY8 module only: The channel uses a Voltage input type in any input range and the input signal value reaches full
scale.
Chxx.OpenWire 5094-IY8 module only: The channel uses a Voltage input type in any input range and the input signal value reaches full
scale.The channel uses a Current input type in only the 4…20 mA input range and the input signal goes below 100 µA.
The input signal at the channel is below 100 µA.
Fault When the channel uses RTD or Thermocouple input type and a wire is disconnected from the channel.
CJChxx.OpenWire The 5094-TB3IT terminal block has an internal open wire.
Chxx.Underrange The channel data is beneath the absolute minimum for this channel.
CJChxx.Underrange The cold junction at the channel is beneath the absolute minimum for this channel.
Chxx.Overrange The channel data is above the absolute maximum for this channel.
CJChxx.Overrange The cold junction at the channel is above the absolute maximum for this channel.
Chxx.FieldPowerOff Field power is not present on the channel.
CJChxx.FieldPowerOff Field power is not present at the cold junction.
(1) This tag provides module-wide data and affects all channels simultaneously.

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

Table 23 - Module Status Tags

Type Tag Name Event
RunMode(1) The module is in Run Mode.
DiagnosticActive Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics threshold is reached.
A counter that increments when a diagnostic condition occurs or goes away. The counter is a rolling counter that skips
DiagnosticSequenceCount 0 on rollovers.
Chxx.Uncertain The channel data can be imperfect but it is not known to what degree of inaccuracy.
CJChxx.Uncertain The cold junction data can be inaccurate but it is not known to what degree of inaccuracy.
Chxx.OverTemperature(2) The module is operating at a higher temperature than its rated operating limits.
CJChxx.Temperature Current temperature of the cold junction.
(3) The most recently received data value was not a number.
CJChxx.NotANumber
Chxx.NotANumber The most recently received data value was not a number.
The following conditions exist:
The I.Chxx.Data tag value is less than the C.Chxx.LLAlarmLimit tag value or the alarm is latched.
Chxx.LLAlarm The O.Chxx.LLAlarmEn tag is set.
Alarms are enabled for the channel.
The following conditions exist:
The I.Chxx.Data tag value is less than the C.Chxx.LAlarmLimit tag value or the alarm is latched.
Chxx.LAlarm The O.Chxx.LAlarmEn tag is set.
Alarms are enabled for the channel.
The following conditions exist:
Status The I.Chxx.Data tag value is greater than the C.Chxx.HAlarmLimit tag value or the alarm is latched.
Chxx.HAlarm The O.Chxx.HAlarmEn tag is set.
Alarms are enabled for the channel.
The following conditions exist:
The I.Chxx.Data tag value is greater than the C.Chxx.HHAlarmLimit tag value or the alarm is latched.
Chxx.HHAlarm The O.Chxx.HHAlarmEn tag is set.
Alarms are enabled for the channel.
The following conditions exist:
The absolute change between consecutive channel samples exceeds the C.Chxx.RateAlarmLimit tag value or the alarm is
Chxx.RateAlarm latched.
The O.Chxx.RateAlarmEn tag is set.
Alarms are enabled for the channel.
Chxx.Data The channel data in scaled Engineering Units.
A continuously running, 15-bit timer that counts in milliseconds and is not related to CIP Sync.
Chxx.RollingTimestamp Whenever a module scans its channels, it records the value of RollingTimestamp then. The controller program uses the last
two rolling timestamp values to calculate the amount of time between the samples.
Indicates if the calibration did not fail, or a calibration session for a channel was interrupted or failed. CalFault is reset by
Chxx.CalFault product reset or power cycle.
Chxx.Calibrating Indicates if the channel is being calibrated or is not being calibrated.
Chxx.Status(3) Indicates if the status of the channel is good or causing a fault.
CJChxx.Status(3) Indicates if the status of the channel is good or causing a fault.
(1) This tag provides module-wide data and affects all channels simultaneously.
(2) 5094-IY8 module only.
(3) 5094-IRT8S module only.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 61

Chapter 4 Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features

Notes:

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 5
5094-OF8 Analog Output Module Features
The 5094-OF8 output module has eight non-isolated channels. Each channel supports
connection to the following output types:
• Current
• Voltage

IMPORTANT Remember the following:

• This module also has features that apply to all FLEX 5000 analog I/O
modules that are described in Common Analog I/O Module Features on
page 27.
• You can configure the features that are described in this chapter with
the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
For more information on how to configure the module, see Configure
Standard Analog I/O Modules on page 75.

Multiple Output Ranges The 5094-OF8 module offers multiple output ranges. The output type that you choose during
module configuration determines the available ranges.
Table 24 - Output Ranges
Input Type Available Output Range
• 0…20 mA
Current (mA)
• 4…20 mA
• -10…10V
Voltage (V) • 0…5V
• 0…10V

To see where to choose an output range for the 5094-OF8 module, see page 87.

Channel Offset The Channel Offset feature compensates for any known error on the sensor or channel to
which the sensor is connected. The value is set in signal units and is added to the output data.
For example, consider an application that uses the Current (mA) input type with the 4…20 mA
range and scaling at 0…100%. If a channel used in the output range 4…20 mA has an error that
results in it consistently reporting 8 mA as 7.8 mA, you must account for the error by setting
the Channel Offset to 1.25.

To see where to set the channel offset for the 5094-OF8 module, see page 87.

Hold for Initialization Hold for Initialization causes outputs to hold present state until the value commanded by the
controller matches the value at the output screw terminal within 0.1% of full scale, providing a
bumpless transfer.
If Hold for Initialization is selected, outputs hold if there is an occurrence of any of these three
conditions:
• Initial connection is established after power-up.
• A new connection is established after a communication fault occurs.
• There is a transition to Run mode from Program state.
• The module loses SA power. In this case, the data echo value goes to 0.0.
The I.Chxx.InHold tag for a channel indicates that the channel is holding. To see where to
enable Hold for Initialization for the 5094-OF8 module, see page 87.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 63

Chapter 5 5094-OF8 Analog Output Module Features

Connection Fault Handling You can configure 5094-OF8 output module behavior when a connection fault occurs, that is,
the connection between the owner-controller and the output module breaks.

You must define the following:

• Output Behavior Immediately After a Connection Fault
• Fault State Duration After Connection Fault
• Final Fault State Value

Output Behavior Immediately After a Connection Fault

When the connection between an owner-controller and output module breaks, the output can
behave in the following ways. The available options Fault Mode parameter is configured:
• Transition to a specific, user-defined value.
• Hold its last state.
If you configure the output to hold its last state, the output remains at that state value
until the following occurs:
- The connection to the owner-controller is re-established.
- The output returns to normal operation, as defined in the module configuration.

Fault State Duration After Connection Fault

If you configure the output to transition to a specific value after the connection breaks, you
must define how long the output remains at the specified value before it transitions to a Final
Fault State.

You can configure the output to remain at the specific value for the following times:
• Forever
• One second
• Two seconds
• Five seconds
• Ten seconds

After the Fault State Duration time expires, the output transitions to user-defined Final Fault
State Value.

Final Fault State Value

The Final Fault State Value defines the value to which the output goes after the Fault State
Duration time expires.

Output State Once Connection is Re-established

Once the connection between the owner-controller and output module is re-established, the
output resumes normal operation.

To see where to set the Connection Fault Handling parameters for the 5094-OF8 module, see
page 87.

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 5 5094-OF8 Analog Output Module Features

Output Clamping Output Clamping limits the output from the analog module to remain within a range configured
by the controller, even when the controller commands an output outside that range.

Once clamp values are set, if data received from the controller exceeds those clamps, the
following events occur:
• The output value transitions to the clamp limit but not to the requested value.
• The appropriate limit alarm is triggered.
For more information on limit alarms, see Clamp Alarming on page 65.

For example, an application can set the high clamp on a module for 8V and the low clamp for
-8V. If a controller sends a value corresponding to 9V to the module, the module applies only
8V to its screw terminals.

You can disable or latch clamping alarms on a per channel basis. The alarms are disabled by
default.

IMPORTANT Clamp values are in engineering units and are not automatically
updated when the scaling high and low engineering units are changed.
Failure to update the clamp values can generate a very small output
signal that could be misinterpreted as a hardware problem.
For example, a FLEX 5000 analog output module channel that uses a
Current (mA) output type with Clamping enabled has the following
configuration parameters:
Scaling values:
• High Engineering = 100.0000%
• Low Engineering = 0.0000%
Clamp Limits:
• High Clamp = 100.0000%
• Low Clamp = 0.0000%
If you change the Scaling High Engineering value to 90.0000%, the High
Clamp value remains at 100.0000.
You must change the High Clamp value to 90.0000 to make sure that
the application continues to operate as expected.

To see where to set the high clamp and low clamp parameters for the 5094-OF8 module, see
page 88.

Clamp Alarming Clamp Alarming works directly with Output Clamping. When a module receives a data value
from the controller that exceeds clamping limits, it applies signal values to the clamping limit.
In addition, a limit alarm is triggered.

The following tags indicate that a clamping alarm was triggered. That is, the tag is set to 1.
• I.Chxx.LLimitAlarm
• I.Chxx.HLimitAlarm

For more information on using module tags, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.

Output Ramping/Rate Output Ramping limits the speed at which an analog output signal can change. This prevents
fast transitions in the output from damaging the devices that an output module controls.
Limiting Output Ramping is also known as Rate Limiting.

Table 25 describes the types of ramping that are possible.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 65

Chapter 5 5094-OF8 Analog Output Module Features

Table 25 - Output Ramping Types

Ramping type Description
When the module is in Run mode, ramping occurs to all new output values at
Ramp in Run mode the maximum ramp rate.
When the present output value changes to the Program value after a
Ramp to Program mode Program command is received from the controller.
When the present output value changes to the Fault value after a
Ramp to Fault mode communication fault occurs.

The maximum rate of change in outputs is expressed in engineering units per second (EU/s), is
called the maximum ramp rate and set in the Ramp Rate field.

To see where to enable the Ramp in Run mode for the 5094-OF8 module, see page 88.
To enable the other Output Ramping parameters, you must change module tags to 1.
• Ramp to Program Mode - C.Chxx.RampToProg
• Ramp to Fault Mode and Final Fault State - C.Chxx.RampToFault

For more information on using module tags, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.

Data Echo Data Echo automatically sends channel data values that match the analog value that was sent
to the module’s screw terminals then.

A FLEX 5000 analog output module returns a value that was sent to it by the owner-controller.
The echoed value is indicated in the I.Chxx.Data and is represented in Engineering Units.

Fault and status data are also sent. This data is sent at the RPI.

No Load Detection No Load Detection detects when a wire is disconnected from the channel or a missing load for
each output channel.

IMPORTANT This feature is available only in Current (mA) mode.

The output range used with a FLEX 5000 analog output module determines the current below
which a load is considered missing. For example, if an operating 5094-OF8 uses the 4…20 mA
output range, the presence of a no load condition is detected when the channel is connected
to a load that draws less than 4 mA.

The I.Chxx.NoLoad tag indicates the presence of a no load condition when it is set to 1.

The No Load Detection feature is disabled by default. You must enable the feature in your
Studio 5000 Logix Designer application project. To enable No Load Detection, you must change
the C.Chxx.NoLoadEn tag to 1.
For more information on using module tags, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.

Short Circuit Protection Short Circuit Protection prevents damage that can result from driving a current from the
channel greater than the maximum current level the channel can handle.

IMPORTANT This feature is available only in Voltage (V) mode.

When a short circuit condition is detected, the following occurs:

• The output turns off.
• The I.Chxx.ShortCircuit tag is set to 1.

For more information on using module tags, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.
For more information on the maximum current that you can apply to an output, see the FLEX
5000 Module Specifications Technical Data, publication 5094-TD001.

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 5 5094-OF8 Analog Output Module Features

Over Temperature The Over Temperature Detection feature indicates that the temperature of the conditions
within which the module is operating are higher than the module operating limits.
Detection
When an Over Temperature condition exists, the I.Chxx.OverTemperature tag is set to 1.

Field Power Loss Detection The Field Power Loss Detection feature monitors for the loss of power at an output module
channel. When field power to the module is lost, a channel-level fault is sent to the controller
to identify the exact channel faulted.

Field Power Loss Detection has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program
if a fault occurs. For information on modules, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.

To see where to enable or disable field power detection, see page 86.

Fault and Status Reporting The FLEX 5000 analog output modules send fault and status data with channel data to the
owner and listening controllers. The data is returned via module tags that you can monitor in
your Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.

With some exceptions, as noted in the following table, the FLEX 5000 analog output modules
provides the fault and data status in a channel-centric format.

Table 26 lists the FLEX 5000 analog output modules’s fault and status tags available in the
Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
Table 26 - 5094-OF8 Module- Fault and Status Data Tags
Data Type Tag Name Triggering Event That Sets Tag
(1) The owner-controller loses its connection to the module.
ConnectionFaulted
Chxx.Fault The channel data quality is bad.
Fault Chxx.NoLoad A no load condition exists on the channel.
Chxx.ShortCircuit A short circuit condition exists on the channel.
Chxx.OverTemperature The module is at a higher temperature than its rated operating limits.
RunMode(1) The module is in Run Mode.
DiagnosticActive Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics threshold is reached.
A counter that increments when a diagnostic condition occurs or goes away. The counter is a rolling counter that
DiagnosticSequenceCount skips 0 on rollovers.
Chxx.Uncertain The channel data can be imperfect.
Chxx.FieldPowerOff Field power is not present on the channel.
Chxx.InHold The channel is holding until the received channel data is within 0.1% of the current channel data value.
Chxx.NotANumber The most recently received data value was not a number.
The following conditions exist:
Status • Alarms are enabled on this channel.
Chxx.LLimitAlarm
• The channel data requested, indicated in the O.Chxx.Data tag, is currently less than the configured LowLimit or the
alarm is latched.
The following conditions exist:
• Alarms are enabled on this channel.
Chxx.HLimitAlarm
• The channel data requested, indicated in the O.Chxx.Data tag, is currently greater than the configured HighLimit or
the alarm is latched.
Chxx.RampAlarm The channel is currently limited to changing the output at the Maximum Ramp rate or once was and is now latched.
The channel data in scaled Engineering Units. This data is the Output Data Echo data returned from the D/A
Chxx.Data converter.
15-bit timestamp that ‘rolls’ from 0…32,767 ms. Compatible with existing PID instruction to calculate sample deltas
Chxx.RollingTimestamp automatically.
(1) This tag provides module-wide data and affects all channels simultaneously.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 67

Chapter 5 5094-OF8 Analog Output Module Features

Notes:

68 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 6
Safety I/O Module Features
This chapter describes features that are specific to FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules. FLEX 5000
safety I/O modules have additional items to be aware of. Type approval, certification, and
suitability for use in safety applications vary by catalog number.

These modules can be used with GuardLogix 5580 and Compact GuardLogix 5380 safety
controllers in applications up to SIL 3, PLe, Cat. 4 in single-channel and dual-channel
configurations. The SIL rating for the channel (SIL 1, SIL 2, SIL 3) depends on the device
connected to the channel.

These restrictions apply to the modules:

• Type-approved and certified for use in safety applications up to and including SIL 3 per
IEC 61508
• Suitable for use in safety applications up to and including SIL CL 3 per IEC 62061
• Suitable for use in safety applications up to and including Performance Level e (PLe),
category 4 per ISO 13849-1

The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, version 33.00 or later, is the configuration and
programming tool for these modules.

IMPORTANT TÜV Rheinland has approved GuardLogix 5580 and Compact GuardLogix
5380 controller systems for use in safety-related applications where
the de-energized state is always considered to be the safe state.

IMPORTANT Functional safety certification and performance of FLEX 5000 safety

I/O modules requires that the modules operate in conditions at or
below the ambient operating temperature specification.
The Probability of Failure on Demand (PFD) and average frequency of a
dangerous failure per hour (PFH) calculations for these modules are
based on the module operating conditions adhering to the ambient
operating temperature specification.
For more information on the maximum ambient operating temperature
specification for FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules, see the FLEX 5000
Module Specifications Technical Data, publication 5094-TD001.

IMPORTANT Requirements are based on the ISO standards that are current at the
time of certification.
For more information on safety application suitability levels with the
FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules, see Safety Application Suitability Levels
on page 70.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 69

Chapter 6 Safety I/O Module Features

Safety Application Table 27 describes the safety application suitability levels for a 5094-IRT8S and 5094-IRT8SXT
module.
Suitability Levels
Table 27 - Safety Application Suitability for 5094-IRT8S and 5094-IRT8SXT Modules
Suitability Level Conditions Notes
Consider the following:
• To achieve SIL CL3 single-channel, the sensor that is
• Input is Thermocouple, RTD 2-wire or RTD 3-wire used must be SIL CL3 single-channel as well.
– Use other measures against external wiring faults. • The safety I/O module provides diagnostics to a
Applications that are rated up to, and including, SIL CL3, • Input is RTD 4-wire specific Suitability Level with conditions.
– Use 2 channels and cross compare the data using The larger safety system within which the safety I/O
PLe, Cat.4, as defined in IEC 61508, IEC61551, IEC 62061, ladder logic. module resides can provide the diagnostic necessary
and ISO 13849-1 – Use other measures against external wiring faults. to achieve the stated Suitability Level without the
• Use sheathed cable or cable trunk to separate conditions imposed by the safety I/O module.
channel wiring to mitigate short-circuit faults. To achieve the specific Safety Integrity Level, see
Application/Wiring Examples for Safety I/O Modules
on page 155.

Safety Considerations for Verify that the firmware revision of the device is correct before commissioning the system.
Module Firmware
IMPORTANT • Safety Consideration You must inhibit a safety I/O module before
updating its firmware with ControlFLASH™ software.
• We recommend that you wait three minutes before using the module
after a firmware update via ControlFLASH.

Firmware information for safety I/O devices is available at the Rockwell Automation
Product Compatibility and Download Center (PCDC).

Only download firmware and access product release notes from the (PCDC).

Do not download firmware from non-Rockwell Automation sites.

ATTENTION: Safety Function During Firmware Update

The FLEX 5000 I/O safety modules are not safety capable when a firmware
update is in process. You must use other methods to maintain the safety
function during the update process.

Single-channel or You can use FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules in single-channel mode or dual-channel
configuration. The configuration affects the safety application suitability level for a module.
Dual-channel Mode
In single-channel mode, the signal status on one channel is evaluated. Based on that status,
safety input data and safety input status can be off or on.
In dual-channel mode, the consistency between the signal status on two channels is evaluated
in the controller. Based on the status on both channels, safety input data and safety input
status can be off or on. This consistency check needs to be conducted in the controller with
the Dual Channel Analog Input instruction. The Dual Channel Analog Input instruction monitors
two analog input channels originating from an analog input module. Output 1 turns on when
both analog inputs, Channel A and Channel B, are within the Tolerance and the High and Low
Limit settings, and correct reset actions have been performed

70 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 6 Safety I/O Module Features

Determine Conformity
ATTENTION: Use only appropriate components or devices that comply with
the relevant safety standards and meet the required safety integrity level or
performance level and safety category.
• Conformity to the requirements of the relevant safety standards must be
determined for the entire system by conducting a risk assessment.
• Use devices properly according to the installation environment, performance
rating, and functions of the machine.
• Use devices within their specified ratings.
• We recommend that you consult a certification body regarding assessment
of conformity to the required safety integrity level or performance level.
You are responsible for confirming compliance with the applicable
standards for the entire system. You must read, understand, and fulfill the
functional safety requirements of the standard applicable to your safety
application.

Safety Precautions
ATTENTION: Personnel responsible for the application of safety-related
programmable electronic systems (PES) shall be aware of the safety
requirements in the application of the system and shall be trained in the
use of the system.
Observe these precautions for the proper use FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules.

ATTENTION: As serious injury can occur due to loss of required safety

function, follow these safety precautions.
• Do not use standard I/O data or explicit message data as safety data.
• Do not use light-emitting diode (LED) status indicators on the I/O modules for
safety operations.
• Do not connect loads beyond the rated value to the safety outputs.
• Apply properly specified voltages to the module. Applying inappropriate
voltages can cause the module to fail to perform its specified function,
which could lead to loss of safety functions or damage to the module.
• Wire the FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules as shown in the FLEX 5000 Module
Specifications Technical Data, publication 5094-TD001.
• Set unique network node addresses before connecting devices to the
network.
• Perform testing to confirm that device wiring, configuration, and operation
is correct before starting system operation.
• Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the module. This can result in loss of
safety functions.

Installing and Replacing Modules

ATTENTION:
• Clear previous configuration data before connecting devices to the network
or connecting input or output power to the device.
• Configure the replacement device properly and confirm that it operates
correctly.
• After installation of the module, a safety administrator must confirm the
installation and conduct trial operation and maintenance.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 71

Chapter 6 Safety I/O Module Features

Safety Application Safety application requirements include evaluating the following:

Requirements • Probability of failure rates (PFD and PFH)
• System reaction time settings
• Functional verification tests that fulfill appropriate safety-level criteria

Creating, recording, and verifying the safety signature is also a required part of the safety
application development process. The safety controller creates the safety signatures. The
safety signature consists of an identification number, date, and time that uniquely identifies
the safety portion of a project. This number includes all safety logic, data, and safety I/O
configuration.

For safety system requirements, including information on the safety network number (SNN),
verifying the safety signature, functional verification test intervals, system reaction time, and
PFD/PFH calculations, see the GuardLogix 5580 and Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controller
Systems Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM012.

You must read, understand, and fulfill the requirements that are described in this publication
before you operate a safety system that uses FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules.

Safe State .

ATTENTION: The channel safe state is defined as Chxx.Fault is 1 and

Chxx.Status is 0. You must validate the data using the safety status before
use.
Figure 7 - Safety Status

Networks Safety status is indicated by Fault bit set

and Status bit not set.

Safety Status

Output OFF Input

IMPORTANT If you inhibit a safety module from transitioning to a safe state when a
fault occurs because an I/O connection is lost, you accept responsibility
for any consequences that result from your decision to inhibit.
We recommend that you use other means to maintain the safe state if
you inhibit the safety module from transitioning to a safe state.

72 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 6 Safety I/O Module Features

Configuration Signature and Every FLEX 5000 I/O safety module in a system has a configuration signature and
configuration ownership.
Ownership
Configuration Signature
Each safety device has a unique configuration signature that defines the module
configuration. The configuration signature includes the following:
• ID number
• Date
• Time

The configuration signature is used to verify a module’s configuration.

IMPORTANT The signature can only be considered “verified” (and configuration

locked) after user testing.

Configuration Ownership
The connection between the owner-controller and the FLEX 5000 I/O safety module is based
on the following:
• FLEX 5000 I/O safety module node number
• FLEX 5000 I/O safety module safety network number
• Controller node or slot number

IMPORTANT If the owner-controller is a Compact GuardLogix 5380 controller,

the controller has a node number.
If the owner-controller is a GuardLogix 5580 controller,
the controller has a slot number.
• Controller safety network number
• Path from the controller to the FLEX 5000 I/O safety module
• Configuration signature

If any differences are detected, the connection between the owner-controller and the FLEX
5000 I/O safety module is lost, the yellow yield icon appears in the controller project tree.

Different Configuration Owner

When a controller owns the I/O module configuration, other controllers can listen to the input
module. In this case, the module configuration signature in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
project for any listening controller must match the one in the owner-controller project.
If the safety module is configured for inputs only, you can copy and paste the
configuration signature from one project to the other.
If the safety module has safety outputs, the configuration signature parameter is
disabled.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 73

Chapter 6 Safety I/O Module Features

Reset FLEX 5000 safety I/O If a FLEX 5000 safety I/O module was used previously, you must clear the configuration
ownership before you can install it on a safety network. That is, you must return the module
Modules to Out-of-Box State configuration to its out-of-box state.

When a FLEX 5000 safety I/O module is in the out-of-box state, its configuration is not owned
by a controller.

The Safety category on the Module Properties dialog box displays the module Configuration
Ownership. The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application project must be online to check.

If the module configuration is owned, the Safety category displays whether the controller for
the opened project owns the module configuration or another controller owns it.

For information on how to reset the module in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, see
Reset to Out-of-Box Configuration on page 106.

You cannot reset the module to its out-of-box configuration if either of the following
conditions is true:
• Pending edits to the module properties exist
• Safety signature exists in the controller project

74 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 7
Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules
This chapter describes how to configure these FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules in a Studio 5000
Logix Designer application project:
• 5094-IF8
• 5094-IF8XT
• 5094-IY8
• 5094-IY8XT
• 5094-OF8
• 5094-OF8XT

You can use the default module configuration or edit the module configuration.

IMPORTANT Consider the following:

• You must use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, version 31 or
later, to configure the FLEX 5000 I/O modules. Version 31 or later is
slightly different from previous programming software versions. For
example, in some cases, instead of tabs across the top of the Module
Properties dialog box, the application uses categories on the left side of
the dialog box.
• This chapter does not explain the user-configurable module features that
you can edit on different screens in your Studio 5000 Logix Designer
application project.
For detailed information about module features, see the following:
• Common Analog I/O Module Features
• 5094-IF8 Analog Input Module Features
• Current/Voltage/Temperature-sensing (5094-IY8) and RTD/
Thermocouple (5094-IRT8S) Analog Input Module Features
• 5094-OF8 Analog Output Module Features

When a controller establishes a connection to a 5094-IY8 module, it uses a Class 3

connection. We recommend that you reserve one Class 3 connection on the FLEX
5000 EtherNet/IP adapter to establish a connection to the module. Otherwise, you
can encounter a “Connection Request Error: Module connection limit exceeded”
error.

Before You Begin You must complete the following tasks before you can configure the module:
1. Create a Studio 5000 Logix Designer application project.
2. Add a FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapter to the project.
For more information on how to add a FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapter to a Studio 5000
Logix Designer application project, see FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual,
publication 5094-UM005.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 75

Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

Create a New Module After you create a Studio 5000 Logix Designer application project and add a FLEX 5000
EtherNet/IP adapter to the project, you can use the following methods to add modules to the
project.
• Discover Modules
• New Module

Discover Modules
To use the Discover Modules method with FLEX 5000 I/O modules, complete these steps.
1. Go online with your Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.
The project must include a FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapter.
2. Right-click the FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapter and choose Discover Modules.
The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application automatically detects available modules
that are connected to the backplane.

3. At the Select Module Type window, click Create to add the discovered module to your
project.

76 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

4. At the New Module window, configure the module properties and select OK.

5. At the warning dialog box, make sure that Inhibit module connection(s) is selected and
click Yes.

6. Close the Select Module Type dialog box.

To add additional I/O modules with this method, complete one of the following:
• If you cleared the Close on Create check box when you created the first I/O module,
repeat Step 3…Step 6.
• If you did not clear the Close on Create checkbox when you created the first I/O module,
repeat Step 2…Step 6.

New Module
To use the New Module method with FLEX 5000 I/O modules, complete these steps.
This example shows how to add an I/O module when the Studio 5000 Logix
Designer application project is offline.
You can add new modules when the project is online, if desired. In this case, the
steps are similar to the steps described in Discover Modules on page 76. One
exception is that, in step 1, you choose New Module instead of Discover Modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 77

Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

1. Right-click FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapter and choose New Module.

2. Select the module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears. It includes a list of categories on the left side. The
number and type of categories varies by module type.

78 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

3. You can click OK to use the default configuration as shown or edit the module
configuration. The rest of this chapter describes how to edit module configuration
categories.

To add additional remote I/O modules with this method, complete one of the following:
• If you cleared the Close on Create checkbox when you created the first I/O module,
repeat Step 2…Step 3.
• If you did not clear the Close on Create checkbox when you created the first I/O module,
repeat Step 1…Step 3.

Edit the Module You click the category names in the New Module dialog box to view and change the
configuration parameters that are associated with that module.
Configuration Common
Categories IMPORTANT This chapter shows how to edit configuration when you add the module
to the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application project.
If you access the module configuration after it has been added to the
project, the dialog box is named Module Properties. The Module
Properties dialog box shows the same categories as the New Module
dialog box.

Some new module configuration categories apply to all FLEX 5000 analog
I/O modules. Some categories are specific to the module type.

For example purposes, the figures in this section are from a 5094-IF8 module.

The following categories apply to all FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules and are described in this
section:
• General Category
• Connection Category
• Module Info Category

General Category
The General category appears first when you create a module. The parameters in this category
are the same for all FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules.

You use this category to complete the following tasks:

• Name the module.
• Assign a slot number. (required)
• Describe the module.
• Access the Module Definition.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 79

Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

Module Definition

Module Definition parameters are available on the General tab of the Module Properties dialog
box in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application project.

Table 28 describes the parameters on the Module Definition dialog box.

IMPORTANT The graphic is an example of a Module Definition dialog box. The same
set of fields and options are not available on all FLEX 5000 I/O modules.

Table 28 - Module Definition Parameters

Parameter Definition Available Choices(1)
Series Module hardware series Module-specific
Revision Module firmware revision, including major and minor revision levels Module-specific
Software method by which you reduce the possibility of using the wrong device in a control system.
For more information, see the following: Exact Match
Electronic Keying Compatible Module
• View the Module Tags on page 89 Disable Keying
• Electronic Keying in Logix 5000 Control Systems Application Technique, publication LOGIX-AT001
Determines the following for the module type you configure:
Data with Calibration
• Available configuration parameters Data
Connection
• Data type transferred between the module and the controller
Listen Only(2)
• Which tags are generated when configuration is complete
Input Data - Input modules only All available configuration, input, and output data for the input module that is being defined. Analog Data
Analog Data
None - This choice is
Output Data - Output module only All available configuration, input, and output data for the output module that is being defined. available only if you use the
Listen Only Connection
choice.
(1) The range of available choices varies by module type.
(2) Controller and module establish communication without the controller sending any configuration or output data to the module. A full input data connection is established but depends on the
connection between the owner-controller and the module.

Connection Category
The Connection category lets you complete the following tasks:
• Set the RPI rate. For more information about the RPI, see Requested Packet Interval on
page 20.
• Set the connection type to use on the EtherNet/IP network.
For more information on Unicast and Multicast connections, see the FLEX 5000
EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual, publication 5094-UM005.

80 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

• Inhibit the module. For more information on how to inhibit the module, see Module
Inhibiting on page 29.
• Configure whether a connection failure while the controller is in Run module causes a
major or minor fault.
The Module Fault area of the Connection category is useful during module
troubleshooting. For more information on the Module Fault area, see page 125

Module Info Category

The Module Info category displays module and status information about the module when the
project is online. You can use this category to complete the following:
• Determine the identity of the module.
• Access module diagnostics
• Refresh the data on the screen
• Reset the module

Edit 5094-IF8 Module In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the following categories are
available when you configure a 5094-IF8 module:
Configuration Categories
• Channels Category
• Calibration Category

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Channels Category and
Calibration Category do not appear.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 81

Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

Channels Category
The Channels category shows an overview of the configuration values for all module channels.
The values for each parameter indicate how that particular channel is configured on that
channel’s category.

The following shows the Channels category for the 5094-IF8 module.

IMPORTANT You can edit the fields on the Channels category dialog box.
We recommend that you change channel configuration on the specific
channel categories as described in the rest of this section.
Use this view to monitor configuration for all channels on the module.
Chxx Category

The Chxx category, where xx represents the channel number, shows the configuration options
available for the channel. The Scaling and Filter options correspond to the input type and
range for the channel.

If desired, you can disable the channel on this dialog box.

82 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

Alarms Category

Each channel on the 5094-IF8 module has an Alarms category with which it is associated. The
Signal Units correspond to the input type and range for the channel.

If desired, you can disable alarms on this dialog box.

Calibration Category
The Calibration category provides calibration information for all channels on the module. This
category is blank when you add a module to the project.
Use this category during the calibration process. For more information on how to calibrate a
module, see Calibrate the Modules on page 109.

Edit 5094-IY8 Module In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the following categories are
available when you configure a 5094-IY8 module:
Configuration Categories
• Channels Category
• CJ Channels Category
• Calibration Category

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Channels Category and
Calibration Category do not appear.

Channels Category
The Channels category shows an overview of the configuration values for all module channels.
The values for each parameter indicate how that particular channel is configured on that
channel’s category.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 83

Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

The following shows the Channels category for the 5094-IY8 module.

IMPORTANT You can edit the fields on the Channels category dialog box.
We recommend that you change channel configuration on the specific
channel categories as described in the rest of this section.
Use this view to monitor configuration for all channels on the module.

Chxx Category

The Chxx category, where xx represents the channel number, shows the configuration options
available for the channel. The Scaling and Filter options correspond to the input type and
range for the channel.

If desired, you can disable the channel on this dialog box.

Wiring parameter has two options. You must select one option based on your application:
• Single-Ended
- For use in 2-wire or 3-wire voltage or current transmitter application where the
transmitter power is taken from the 5094-IY8 module.
• Differential
- For use in RTD or thermocouple mode.

84 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

Channel Diagnostics Page

Displays the diagnostics channel information when connected with the module. When online
with the module, click the Diagnostics button on the Chxx category to see diagnostic
information.

Alarms Category

Each channel on the 5094-IY8 module has an Alarms category with which it is associated. The
Signal Units correspond to the input type and range for the channel.

If desired, you can disable alarms on this dialog box.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 85

Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

CJ Channels Category
The CJ Channels category is used when you connect a module channel to a Thermocouple
input type. You can select the input channel that is used as an external CJ channel.
s

Calibration Category
The Calibration category provides calibration information for all channels on the module. This
category is blank when you add a module to the project.

Use this category during the calibration process. For more information on how to calibrate a
module, see Calibrate the Modules on page 109.

Edit 5094-OF8 Module In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the following categories are
available when you configure a 5094-OF8 module:
Configuration Categories
• Channels Category
• Calibration Category

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Channels Category and
Calibration Category do not appear.

Channels Category
The Channels category shows an overview of the configuration values for all module channels.
The values for each parameter indicate how that particular channel is configured on that
channel’s category.

86 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

The following shows the Channels category for the 5094-OF8 module.

IMPORTANT You can edit the fields on the Channels category dialog box.
We recommend that you change channel configuration on the specific
channel categories as described in the rest of this section.
Use this view to monitor configuration for all channels on the module.

Chxx Category

The Chxx category, where xx represents the channel number, shows the configuration options
available for the channel. The Scaling options correspond to the input type and range for the
channel.

If desired, you can disable the channel on this dialog box.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 87

Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

Limits Category

Each channel on the 5094-OF8 module has a Limits category with which it is associated. The
Signal Units options correspond to the input type and range for the channel.

Calibration Category
The Calibration category provides calibration information for all channels on the module. This
category is blank when you add a module to the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application
project.
You use this category during the calibration process. For more information on how to calibrate
a module, see Calibrate the Modules on page 109.

88 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

View the Module Tags When you create a module, the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application creates a set of tags
that you can view in the Tag Editor. Each configured feature on your module has a distinct tag
that is available for use in the controller program logic.

Complete the following steps to access the module tags.

1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click Controller Tags and choose Monitor Tags.

The Controller Tags dialog box appears with data.

2. To view module tags as shown, click the symbols.

For more information on module tags, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 89

Chapter 7 Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules

Notes:

90 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 8
Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O
Modules
This chapter describes how to configure your FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules in a Studio 5000
Logix Designer application project.

IMPORTANT You must use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, version 33 or
greater with the modules.

This chapter does not explain the user-configurable parameters, or corresponding module
features, in your Studio 5000 Logix Designer application project.

IMPORTANT By default, all safety input and output channels on FLEX 5000 safety I/O
modules are disabled.
You must configure each channel that is used in a safety application.

Before You Begin You must complete the following tasks before you can configure the module:
1. Create a Studio 5000 Logix Designer application project.
2. If you use the FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules as remote I/O modules, add a FLEX 5000
I/O EtherNet/IP adapter to the project.
For more information on how to add a FLEX 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter to a Studio
5000 Logix Designer application project, see the FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP Adapter User
Manual, publication 5094-UM005.

Once the project is created and, if necessary, the adapter is added, you can create a new
module in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application project.

Create a New Module Unlike FLEX 5000 standard I/O modules, you cannot add FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules to a
Studio 5000 Logix Designer project while the project is online. The project must be offline to
add FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules to it.
To create a new FLEX 5000 safety I/O module, complete these steps.
1. Add a FLEX 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter to the project.
This example uses a 5094-AENTR or 5094-AEN2TR adapter.
2. Right-click the FLEX 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter and choose New Module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 91

Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

3. Select the module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears with a list of categories on the left side. The
number and type of categories varies by module type.
4. You can click OK to use the default configuration as shown or edit the module
configuration. The rest of this chapter describes how to edit module configuration
categories.

To add additional I/O modules with this method, complete one of the following:
• If you cleared the Close on Create checkbox when you created the first I/O module,
repeat Step 3…Step 4.
• If you did not clear the Close on Create checkbox when you created the first I/O module,
repeat Step 2…Step 4.

Edit the Module You click the category names in the New Module dialog box to view and change the
configuration parameters. Before you edit the module configuration, consider the following:
Configuration Common
• This chapter shows how to edit configuration when you add the module to the Studio
Categories 5000 Logix Designer application project.
If you access the module configuration after it is added to the project, the dialog box is
named Module Properties. The same categories are displayed as the categories
displayed on the New Module dialog box.
• Some new module configuration categories apply to all FLEX 5000 analog safety I/O
modules. Some categories are specific to the module type.

92 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

IMPORTANT By default, all safety input and output channels on FLEX 5000 safety I/O
modules are disabled.
You must configure each point that is used in a Safety application.

The following categories apply to all FLEX 5000 analog safety I/O modules and are described in
these sections:
• General Category
• Connection Category
• Safety Category
• Module Info Category

General Category
The General category appears first when you create a module. The parameters in this category
are the same for all FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules.

You use this category to complete the following tasks:

• Name the module.
• Assign a node number.
• Describe the module.
• Access the Module Definition.
Safety Network Number

The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application automatically assigns a Safety Network Number
(SNN) to FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules as they are added to the project.

The SNN is a time-based number that uniquely identifies subnets across all networks in the
safety system. All FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules in a same system use the same SNN and are
automatically assigned the same SNN by default.

The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application assigns an SNN to the first safety module that is
added to a remote system. The application assigns the same SNN to additional safety modules
that are added to this remote I/O system.

For more information on Safety Network Numbers, see the GuardLogix 5580 and Compact
GuardLogix 5380 Controller Systems Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM012.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 93

Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

Module Definition

Module Definition parameters are available on the General tab of the Module Properties dialog
box in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application project.

Table 29 describes the parameters that are available on the Module Definition dialog box.
Table 29 - Module Definition Parameters
Parameter Definition Available Choices
Series Module hardware series Module-specific
Revision Module firmware revision, including major and minor revision levels Module-specific
Software method by which you reduce the possibility of using the wrong device in a control system.
For more information, see the following: • Exact Match
Electronic Keying • Electronic Keying on page 30 • Compatible Module
• Electronic Keying in Logix 5000 Control Systems Application Technique, publication LOGIX-AT001
Determines the following for the module type you configure: • This Controller
Configured By
• Which controller tags are generated when configuration is complete • External Means(1)
Determines what type of input data is exchanged between the module and the controller.
Input Data Safety data
Creates all controller tags specific to the module type being used.
Output Data Determines what type of output data is exchanged between the module and the controller. Safety data
(1) Controller and module establish communication without the controller sending any configuration or output data to the module. A full input data connection is established but depends on the
connection between the owner-controller and the module.

Connection Category
The Connection category lets you inhibit the module.
Before you inhibit the module, make sure that you are aware of the impact it has on your
application. For more information on inhibiting the module, see Module Inhibiting on page 29.

IMPORTANT Unlike FLEX 5000 standard I/O modules, you cannot set the RPI for FLEX
5000 safety I/O modules on the Connections category. For FLEX 5000
safety I/O modules, you set the RPI on the Safety category.

94 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

Connection Over the EtherNet/IP Network

Remote FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules support the Connection over EtherNet/IP parameter.
• With safety input data, you can choose Unicast or Multicast.
• With safety output data, you must choose Unicast.

For more information on unicast and multicast connections, see the FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP
Adapter User Manual, publication 5094-UM005.

Safety Category
The Safety category lets you set the RPI rate.

To change the Connection Reaction Time Limit configuration, click Advanced.

IMPORTANT Remember, the Safety Task period determines the 5094-IRT8S module
safety output connection RPI.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 95

Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

For more information on the RPI and the Connection Reaction Time Limit parameters, see
Requested Packet Interval on page 20.

Module Info Category

The Module Info category displays module and status information about the module when
the project is online. You can use this category to complete the following:
• Determine the identity of the module.
• Access module diagnostics.
• Refresh the data on the screen.
• Reset the module.

Edit 5094-IRT8S Module In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the following
categories are available when you configure a 5094-IRT8S module:
Configuration Categories
• Channels Category
• Calibration Category

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Channels Category
and Calibration Category do not appear.

Channels Category
The Channels category shows an overview of the configuration values for all module
channels. The values for each parameter indicate how that particular channel is
configured on that channel’s category.

The following shows the Channels category for the 5094-IRT8S module.

IMPORTANT You can edit the fields on the Channels category dialog box.
We recommend that you change channel configuration on the
specific channel categories as described in the rest of this section.
Use this view to monitor configuration for all channels on the
module.

96 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

Chxx Category

The Chxx category, where xx represents the channel number, shows the configuration options
available for the channel. The Scaling and Filter options correspond to the input type and
range for the channel. If desired, you can disable the channel on this dialog box.

CJ Sensor Offset

A user-defined offset in engineering units added directly into the measured data, used to
compensate for inherent sensor offset. Commonly used with thermocouple sensors. You can
also disable the CJ Channel.
When the 5094-IRT8S module is operating in environment where the temperature
is outside thermocouple range, the channel can be faulted.
When the 5094-IRT8S module is operating in environment where the temperature is outside
thermocouple range, the channel can be faulted.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 97

Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

Channel Diagnostics Page

Displays the diagnostics channel information when connected with the module. When online
with the module, click the Diagnostics button on the Chxx category to see diagnostic
information.

Alarms Category

Each channel on the 5094-IRT8S module has an Alarms category with which it is associated.
The Signal Units correspond to the input type and range for the channel.

If desired, you can disable alarms on this dialog box.

98 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

Calibration Category
The Calibration category provides calibration information for all channels on the module. This
category is blank when you add a module to the project.

Use this category during the calibration process. For more information on how to calibrate a
module, see Calibrate a Safety Analog I/O Module on page 100.

View the Module Tags When you create a module, the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application creates a set of tags
that you can view in the Tag Editor.

Each configured feature on your module has a distinct tag that is available for use in the
controller program logic.

Complete the following steps to access the tags for a module.

1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click Controller Tags and choose Monitor Tags.

The Controller Tags dialog box appears with data.

2. To view the tags, click the triangle symbols.

For more information on module tags, see Module Tag Definitions on page 129.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 99

Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

Calibrate a Safety Analog The modules are calibrated during the manufacturing process. Each module’s accuracy
remains high throughout its lifespan. You are not required to calibrate the module.
I/O Module
ATTENTION: After calibration, IEC 61508 requires the user to perform
various functional verification tests of the equipment used in the system.

Before You Begin

You can calibrate on a per channel basis or in groups.

IMPORTANT You must inhibit the module and perform a safety reset before starting
the calibration or reverting to factory calibration.

The purpose of calibrating the module is to improve the module’s accuracy and repeatability.
When you calibrate 5094-IRT8S input modules, you use a precision mV source or ohms
reference signals to send a signal to the module to calibrate it.

To maintain your module's factory calibration accuracy, we recommend instrumentation with

the specifications listed below. A high resolution DMM can also be used to adjust a voltage/
current calibrating source to its value.
Cat. No. Channel Input Type Recommended Instrument Specifications
RTD 1.0…448 Ω resistors ±0.01%
5094-IRT8S 0…50 mV source ±0.5 µV
Thermocouple (mV) 0…100 mV source ±0.5 µV

IMPORTANT Do not calibrate your module with an instrument that is less accurate
than those recommended. The following events can result:
• Calibration appears to occur normally but the module gives inaccurate
data during operation.
• A calibration fault occurs, forcing you to abort calibration.
• The I.Chxx.CalFault tag is set for the channel you attempted to calibrate.
• You can clear the tag by completing a valid calibration or cycling power
to the module.
Controller State During Calibration

You must add the module to your Studio 5000 Logix Designer application project, before you
can calibrate it. The project must be online with the owner-controller to calibrate the modules.
You can calibrate in the following conditions:
• The controller in Program mode--either Remote Program or Program mode.
• If there are no connections to the module.
Calibration Impacts Data Quality on Entire Input Module Group

When a channel on the module is being calibrated, the Notch Filter setting for that channel
changes to 10 Hz. This results in the I.Chxx.Uncertain tag being set to 1 for that channel until
calibration is completed.

Since you cannot calibrate a channel on the 5094-IRT8S module until after a safety reset, the
other channels not being calibrated are not affected, as the module is not running.

100 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

Start the Calibration

You apply low and high signal references to the module to calibrate it. The references must
match the input range the channel is using.

IMPORTANT You must inhibit the module and perform a safety reset before Start
Calibration or Revert to Factory Calibration. You can only calibrate a
safety module when there is no safety signature.

Table 30 lists the input ranges and corresponding references used to calibrate the modules.
Table 30 - 5094-IRT8S Calibration References
Low Calibration High Calibration
Input Type Input Range Reference Reference
1…500 Ω
2…1000 Ω
RTD 1Ω 448 Ω
4…2000 Ω
8…4000 Ω
Thermocouple -100…100 mV 0.0 mV 100.0 mV
Thermocouple -78…78 mV 0.0 mV 50.0 mV

This example describes how to calibrate a channel on the 5094-IRT8S module for use with the
RTD input type. The 5094-IRT8S module uses the following resistors to calibrate in ohms:
• 1 Ω resistor for low reference calibration
• 448 Ω resistor for high reference calibration

Complete the following steps:

1. Go online with the project.
2. On the Module Properties Connection Category, inhibit the module.

3. On the Module Properties Connection Category, perform a safety reset.

4. Confirm that the channel to be calibrated is configured for the correct Input Range.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 101

Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

5. On the Calibration category in the Module Properties dialog box, click Start Calibration.

6. When the dialog box appears to confirm that you want to calibrate the channel, click
Yes.

7. Select the channel to calibrate and click Next.

8. When the Attach Low Reference Ohm Sources dialog box appears, connect a 1 Ω
resistor to the channel being calibrated.
9. Click Next.

The One At a Time Low Reference Results dialog box appears and indicates the status of
the calibrated channel.

102 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

10. If the status is OK, click Next.

If the status is not OK, repeat the calibration process.

11. When the Attach High Reference Ohm Sources dialog box appears, connect a 448 Ω
resistor to the channel being calibrated.
12. Click Next.

The One At a Time High Reference Results dialog box appears and indicates the status
of the calibrated channel.
13. If the status is OK, click Next.

If the status is not OK, repeat the calibration process.

14. When the Calibration Completed dialog box appears, click Finish.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 103

Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

Revert to Factory Calibration

You can revert a channel’s gain and offset to the factory calibrated value.

ATTENTION: After calibration, IEC 61508 requires the user to perform

various functional verification tests of the equipment used in the system.

IMPORTANT You must inhibit the module and perform a safety reset before starting
the revert to factory calibration.

EXAMPLE: Complete the following steps:

1. Go online with the project and make sure the controller is in Program mode.
2. On the Calibration category in the Module Properties dialog box, select the channel(s) to
revert to factory calibration.
3. Click Next.

4. When the dialog box appears to confirm that you want to calibrate the channel, click
Yes.

The channels start reverting to the corresponding factory gain and offset values of the range
for which the selected channels are configured.

The Calibration Status column displays the progress of the revert to factory calibration.

Replace a Module Replacing a safety module that sits on a CIP Safety network is more complicated than
replacing standard devices because of the safety network number (SNN).

Safety devices require this more complex identifier to make sure that module numbers that
are duplicated on separate subnets across all of the networks in the application do not
compromise communication between the correct safety devices.

The SNN is a unique identifier that is automatically assigned to each subnet in a safety
application. The same SNN is also assigned to all safety devices on the subnet.

For example, when a FLEX 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter is used in a safety application, the
Studio 5000 Logix Designer project assigns it an SNN. All FLEX 5000 I/O safety modules that
are installed with that adapter, are automatically assigned the same SNN.
104 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025
 Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

However, each FLEX 5000 safety I/O modules require a unique identifier within the same
subnet. A DeviceID is used to uniquely identify each safety module. The SNN and module slot
number make up the DeviceID of the safety module.

Set the SNN Manually

The SNN is used to provide integrity on the initial download to a FLEX 5000
I/O safety module.

If a safety signature exists, the FLEX 5000 I/O safety module must have DeviceID that matches
the module in the safety controller project, before it can receive its configuration.
To maintain integrity, the module SNN must be set manually.
1. On the General category of the Module Properties dialog box, click the ellipsis next to
the Safety Network Number.

2. On the Safety Network Number dialog box, click Manual.

3. Type the SNN in the Number field and click OK.

4. On the Module Properties dialog box, click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 105

Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

Reset to Out-of-Box Configuration

When the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application is online, the Safety tab of the Module
Properties dialog box displays the current configuration ownership. When the opened project
owns the configuration, Local is displayed.

When a second device owns the configuration, Remote is displayed, along with the SNN, and
node address or slot number of the configuration owner. Communication error is displayed if
the module read fails.

If the connection is Local, you must inhibit the module connection before you reset ownership.

To inhibit the module, follow these steps.

1. Right-click the module and choose Properties.
2. On the Connection tab, click Inhibit module.
3. Click Apply and then OK.

Follow these steps to reset the module to its out-of-box configuration when online.
1. Right-click the module and choose Properties.
2. On the Safety tab, click Reset Ownership.

3. When a dialog box appears asking if you want to continue with the reset, read it and
click Yes.

Replace a Module in a Logix 5000 System

Consider the following conditions before you replace a FLEX 5000 safety I/O module in a Logix
5000 system:
• If you rely on a portion of the CIP Safety system to maintain SIL 3 behavior during
module replacement and functional testing, you must use the Configure Only When No
Safety Signature Exists feature.
• If you rely on the entire routable CIP Safety control system to maintain SIL 3/PL (d or e)
during the replacement and functional testing of a module, you can use the Configure
Always feature.

106 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

Replacement with ‘Configure Only When No Safety Signature Exists’ Enabled

When a module is replaced, the configuration is downloaded from the safety controller if the
DeviceID of the new module matches the original. The DeviceID is updated whenever the SNN
is set.

If the project is configured with Configure Only When No Safety Signature Exists enabled,
follow the appropriate instructions in to replace a FLEX 5000 safety I/O module.

After you complete the steps in a scenario correctly, the DeviceID matches the original. This
match enables the safety controller to download the proper module configuration, and re-
establish the safety connection.
Table 31 - Replace a FLEX 5000 Safety I/O Module
Controller Safety Replacement Module Condition Action Required
Signature Exists
No No SNN (Out-of-box) None. The module is ready for use.
Same SNN as original safety task
Yes or No None. The module is ready for use.
configuration
Yes No SNN (Out-of-box) Complete the steps in Set the SNN Manually on page 105.
1. Reset to Out-of-Box Configuration on page 106.
Yes
2. Set the SNN Manually on page 105.
Different SNN from original safety 1. Reset to Out-of-Box Configuration on page 106.
task configuration 2. Follow your company-prescribed procedures to
No
functionally test the replaced I/O device and system
and to authorize the system for use.

Replacement with ‘Configured Always’ Enabled

ATTENTION: Enable the ‘Configure Always’ feature only if the entire CIP
Safety Control System is not being relied on to maintain SIL 3 behavior
during the replacement and functional testing of a module.
Do not place modules that are in the out-of-box condition on a CIP Safety
network when the Configure Always feature is enabled, except while
following this replacement procedure.

When the ‘Configure Always’ feature is enabled, the controller automatically checks for and
connects to a replacement module that meets all the following requirements:
• The controller has configuration data for a compatible module at that network address.
• The module is in out-of-box condition or has an SNN that matches the configuration.

If the project is configured for ‘Configure Always’, follow the appropriate steps to replace a
FLEX 5000 safety I/O module.
1. Remove the old I/O module and install the new module.
If Then
Go to Step 6.
The module is in out-of-box condition No action is needed for the controller to take ownership of the
module.
An SNN mismatch error occurs Go to the next step to reset the module to out-of-box condition.
2. Right-click your I/O module and choose Properties.
3. Click the Safety tab.
4. Click Reset Ownership.
5. Click OK.
6. Follow your company-prescribed procedures to functionally test the replaced I/O
module and system and to authorize the system for use.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 107

Chapter 8 Configure and Replace Safety Analog I/O Modules

Notes:

108 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 9
Calibrate the Modules
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules The FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules are calibrated during the manufacturing process. Each
module’s accuracy remains high throughout its lifespan. You are not required to calibrate the
module.

Use this chapter to calibrate these modules:

• 5094-IF8, 5094-IF8XT
• 5094-IY8, 5094-IY8XT
• 5094-OF8, 5094-OF8XT

To calibrate 5094-IRT8S and 5094-IRT8SXT safety I/O modules, see

Calibrate a Safety Analog I/O Module on page 100.

You can calibrate on a per channel basis or in groups.

IMPORTANT This chapter describes a few example module calibration scenarios. It

does not cover how to calibrate every FLEX 5000 analog I/O module in all
of the operating modes that the module supports.

Before You Begin Consider the following before you begin:

• Controller State During Calibration
• Calibration Impacts Data Quality on Entire Input Module Group

Controller State During Calibration

You must add the module to your Studio 5000 Logix Designer application project, as described
in Configure Standard Analog I/O Modules on page 75, before you can calibrate it.

The project must be online with the owner-controller to calibrate FLEX 5000 analog I/O
modules. You can calibrate in the following conditions:
• The controller in Program mode--either Remote Program or Program mode.
We recommend that your module be in Program mode and not be actively controlling a
process when you calibrate it.
• If there are no connections to the module.

Calibration Impacts Data Quality on Entire Input Module Group

When a channel on a FLEX 5000 analog input module is being calibrated, the Notch Filter
setting for that channel changes to 5 Hz. This results in the I.Chxx.Uncertain tag being set to 1
for that channel until calibration is completed.

Grouped inputs share an Analog-to-Digital converter. As a result when any input channel is in
the calibration process, the I.Chxx.Uncertain tag is set to 1 for the other input channels in that
group. This setting is due to the fact that the data sampling rate slows for all input channels in
the group.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 109

Chapter 9 Calibrate the Modules

Difference Between The purpose of calibrating the FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules is the same for input and output
modules, to improve the module’s accuracy and repeatability. The procedures involved differs
Calibrating an Input Module by module type:
and an Output Module • When you calibrate input modules, you use current, voltage, or ohms reference signals
to send a signal to the module to calibrate it.
• When you calibrate output modules, you use a digital multimeter (DMM) to measure the
current or voltage signal the module is sending out.

To maintain your module's factory calibration accuracy, we recommend instrumentation with

the specifications listed below. A high resolution DMM can also be used to adjust a voltage/
current calibrating source to its value.
Cat. No. Channel Input Type Recommended Instrument Specifications
Current (mA) 1.00…20.00 mA source ±100 nA current
5094-IF8
Voltage (V) 0…10V source ±2 µV voltage
Current (mA) 1.00…20.00 mA source ±100 nA current
Voltage (V) 0…10V source ±2 µV voltage
5094-IY8
RTD 1.0…487.0 Ω resistors ±0.01%
Thermocouple (mV) 0…100 mV source ±0.5 µV
Current (mA) DMM with resolution better than 0.15 µA
5094-OF8
Voltage (V) DMM with resolution better than 1.0 µV

IMPORTANT Do not calibrate your module with an instrument that is less accurate
than those recommended. The following events can result:
• Calibration appears to occur normally but the module gives inaccurate
data during operation.
• A calibration fault occurs, forcing you to abort calibration.
• The I.Chxx.CalFault tag is set for the channel you attempted to calibrate.
• You can clear the tag by completing a valid calibration or cycling power
to the module. In this case, you must recalibrate the module with an
instrument as accurate as recommended.

Calibrate the Input Modules You apply low and high signal references to the FLEX 5000 analog input module to calibrate it.
The references must match the input range the channel is using.

Table 32 lists the input ranges and corresponding references used to calibrate the modules.
Table 32 - FLEX 5000 Analog Input Module Calibration References
Low Calibration High Calibration
Input Type Input Range Reference Reference
-10…10V 0.0V 10.0V
Voltage (V) 0…10V
0…5V 0.0V 5.0V
0…20 mA
Current (mA) 4.0 mA 20.0 mA
4…20 mA
1…500 Ω
2…1000 Ω
RTD (5094-IY8 only) 1Ω 487 Ω
4…2000 Ω
8…4000 Ω
Thermocouple (5094-IY8 only) -100…100 mV 0.0 mV 100.0 mV

110 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 9 Calibrate the Modules

Calibrate the 5094-IF8 Module

This example describes how to calibrate a channel on the 5094-IF8 module for use with a
Voltage (V) input type. Complete the following steps:
1. Connect the voltage calibrator to the channel being calibrated.
2. Go online with the project and make sure the controller is in Program mode.
3. Confirm that the channel to be calibrated is configured for the correct Input Range.
4. On the Calibration category in the Module Properties dialog box, click Start Calibration.

5. When the dialog box appears to confirm that you want to calibrate the channel, click OK.

6. Select the channel to calibrate and click Next.

7. When the Attach Low Reference Voltage Signals dialog box appears, set the calibrator to
the low reference and apply it to the channel.
8. Click Next.

The One At a Time Low Reference Results dialog box appears and indicates the status of
the calibrated channel.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 111

Chapter 9 Calibrate the Modules

9. If the status is OK, click Next.

If the status is not OK, repeat the calibration process.

10. When the Attach High Reference Voltage Signals dialog box appears, set the calibrator
to the high reference and apply it to the module.
11. Click Next.

The One At a Time High Reference Results dialog box appears and indicates the status
of the channel after applying the low reference.
12. If the status is OK, click Next.

If the status is not OK, repeat the calibration process.

13. When the Calibration Completed dialog box appears, click Finish.

Calibrate the 5094-IY8 Module

This example describes how to calibrate a channel on the 5094-IY8 module for use with the
RTD input type. The 5094-IY8 module uses the following resistors to calibrate in ohms:
• 1 Ω resistor for low reference calibration
• 487 Ω resistor for high reference calibration

Complete the following steps:

1. Connect the low reference resistor to the channel being calibrated.

112 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 9 Calibrate the Modules

2. Go online with the project and make sure the controller is in Program mode.
3. Confirm that the channel to be calibrated is configured for the correct Input Range.
4. On the Calibration category in the Module Properties dialog box, click Start Calibration.

5. When the dialog box appears to confirm that you want to calibrate the channel, click OK.

6. Select the channel to calibrate and click Next.

7. When the Attach Low Reference Ohm Sources dialog box appears, connect a 1 Ω
resistor to the channel being calibrated.
8. Click Next.

The One At a Time Low Reference Results dialog box appears and indicates the status of
the calibrated channel.
9. If the status is OK, click Next.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 113

Chapter 9 Calibrate the Modules

If the status is not OK, repeat the calibration process.

10. When the Attach High Reference Ohm Sources dialog box appears, connect a 487 Ω
resistor to the channel being calibrated.
11. Click Next.

The One At a Time High Reference Results dialog box appears and indicates the status
of the calibrated channel.
12. If the status is OK, click Next.

If the status is not OK, repeat the calibration process.

13. When the Calibration Completed dialog box appears, click Finish.

Calibrate the When calibrating a FLEX 5000 analog output channel, the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
application commands the module to output specific signal levels. The signal type is
Output Modules determined by the output type being used by the channel.

Table 33 lists the output ranges and corresponding references used to calibrate the module.
Table 33 - FLEX 5000 Analog Output Module Calibration References
Low Calibration High Calibration
Output Type Output Range Reference Level Reference Level
-10…10V -10.0V 10.0V
Voltage (V) 0…10V 1.0V 10.0V
0…5V 1.0V 5.0V
0…20 mA 1.0 mA 20.0 mA
Current (mA)
4…20 mA 5.0 mA 20.0 mA

You must measure the actual level and record the results to account for any module
inaccuracies.

114 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 9 Calibrate the Modules

Calibrate a 5094-OF8 Module

This example describes how to calibrate a channel on the 5094-OF8 module for use with a
Voltage (V) output type. Complete the following steps:
1. Connect the DMM to the channel being calibrated.
2. Go online with the project and make sure the controller is in Program mode.
3. Confirm that the channel to be calibrated is configured for the correct Output Range.
4. On the Calibration category in the Module Properties dialog box, click Start Calibration.

5. When the dialog box appears to confirm that you want to calibrate the channel, click OK.

6. Select the channel to calibrate and click Next.

7. When the Output Reference Signals dialog box appears, click Next.

The Measure and Record Values dialog box appears.

8. Use a multimeter to measure the reference value of the channel.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 115

Chapter 9 Calibrate the Modules

9. In the Recorded Reference (Volts) column record the measured value and click Next.

The One At a Time Low Reference Results dialog box appears and indicates the status of
the calibrated channel.
10. If the status is OK, click Next.

If the status is not OK, repeat the calibration process.

11. When the Output Reference Signals dialog box appears and indicates the channel to be
calibrated for the high reference, click Next.

The Measure and Record Values dialog box appears.

12. Use a multimeter to measure the reference value of the channel.

116 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Chapter 9 Calibrate the Modules

13. In the Recorded Reference (Volts) column record the measured value and click Next.

The One At a Time High Reference Results dialog box appears and indicates the status
of the calibrated channel.
14. If the status is OK, click Next.

If the status is not OK, repeat the calibration process.

15. When the Calibration Completed dialog box appears, click Finish.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 117

Chapter 9 Calibrate the Modules

Notes:

118 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix A
Troubleshoot Your Module
FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules use the following status indicators:
Applies to these modules: • SA Power Indicator - This indicator operates the same for all FLEX 5000 analog I/O
5094 Standard I/O Modules modules.
5094 Safety I/O Modules • Module Status Indicator - This indicator operates the same for all FLEX 5000 analog I/O
modules.
• I/O Status Indicator - This indicator operates differently based on the module type.

SA Power Indicator Table 34 describes the SA Power indicator on FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules.
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules
Table 34 - SA Power Indicator - FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Modules
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
Complete the following actions:
Off The module is not powered. 1. Confirm that the system is powered.
2. Confirm that the module is installed properly.
Steady green There is SA power to the module. None
Complete the following actions:
1. Confirm that the SA Power wiring on the terminal base is installed
properly.
• Standard Modules: There is no SA power to the module. 2. Check the following:
Steady red • Safety Modules: There is no SA power to the module, or when SA voltage – Confirm that there is sufficient voltage supplied to the module.
is not in the valid range . – If an external power supply is used, confirm that the power supply is
turned on.
– If power is daisychained from the previous terminal base, confirm
that the wiring on the previous terminal base is installed properly.
– Check that the SA voltage is in the correct range (18…32V).

Module Status Indicator Table 35 describes the Module Status indicator on FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules.
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules
5094 Safety I/O Modules
Table 35 - Module Status Indicator - FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Modules
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
Complete the following actions:
Off The module is not powered. 1. Confirm that the system is powered.
2. Confirm that the module is installed properly.
The module has a connection to the owner-controller and is operating
Steady green None
normally.
One of the following conditions exist:
• The module has powered up successfully. Complete the following actions:
• The module does not have a connection to the controller. • Troubleshoot your Studio 5000 Logix Designer application to
determine what is preventing a connection from the module to the
Flashing green • A no connection can result from missing, incomplete, or incorrect controller and correct the issue.
module configuration.
• Confirm that the system conditions require the controller to be in
• Connection to an output module is in the idle state. Remote Run mode or Run mode, transition the controller to one of
• Safety modules: A connection can be established with the controller, those modes.
but initial time coordination exchange is not complete.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 119

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Table 35 - Module Status Indicator - FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Modules (Continued)
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
Complete the following actions:
1. Cycle power to the module.
Steady red The module experienced a nonrecoverable fault.
2. If the status indicator remains in the steady red state, replace the
module.
Complete one of the following:
• Let the firmware update progress complete.
• Reattempt a firmware update after one fails.
• Use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application to determine the
cause of the module fault.
The Connection and Module Info categories of the modules
configuration indicate the fault type.
One of the following conditions exist: To clear a recoverable fault, complete one of the following:
• A module firmware update is in progress. – Cycle module power.
Flashing red • A module firmware update attempt failed. – Click Reset Module in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer project via the
• The device has experienced a recoverable fault. Module Info category of the Module Properties dialog box.
• A connection to the module has timed out. If the fault does not clear after cycling power and clicking Reset
Module, contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support.
• Use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application to determine if a
connection has timed out. The Connection category in the Module
Properties for the module indicates the module state, including if a
connection has timed out.
If a connection has timed out, determine the cause and correct it. For
example, a cable failure can cause a connection timeout.
Commission the UNID on the device. For more information on the UNID
Alternating red/green For safety modules only - Indicates that you must commission the see the GuardLogix 5580 and Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controller
UNID on the device. Systems Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM012.

FLEX 5000 Analog Input Figure 8 shows the status indicators on FLEX 5000 analog input modules.
Modules Status Indicators Figure 8 - FLEX 5000 Analog Input Module Status Indicators

5094-IF8, 5094-IF8XT

FLEX 5000 I/O

®
POWER STATUS

Module status indicator

SA power status indicator

5094-IF8 ANALOG 8 INPUT 2 1 TB3

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I/O status indicators
Input Channel 3 (O03)

Input Channel 4 (O04)

Input Channel 6 (O06)

Input Channel 2 (O02)

Input Channel 5 (O05)

Input Channel 7 (O07)

Input Channel 0 (O00)

Input Channel 1 (O01)

120 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

5094-IY8, 5094-IY8XT

FLEX 5000 I/O

®
POWER STATUS

Module status indicator

SA power status indicator

5094-IY8 UNIVERSAL ANALOG 8 INPUT 3 3 TB3T

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I/O status indicators

Input Channel 0 (O00)

Input Channel 2 (O02)

Input Channel 5 (O05)

Input Channel 3 (O03)

Input Channel 6 (O06)

Input Channel 7 (O07)

Input Channel 1 (O01)

Input Channel 4 (O04)

5094-IRT8S

FLEX 5000 I/O

®
POWER STATUS

Module status indicator

SA power status indicator

5094-IRT8S SAFETY RTD/TC 8 INPUT 3 4 TB3IT

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Input Channel 6 (O06) I/O status indicators
Input Channel 1 (O01)

Input Channel 2 (O02)

Input Channel 5 (O05)

Input Channel 3 (O03)

Input Channel 7 (O07)

Input Channel 0 (O00)

Input Channel 4 (O04)

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 121

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Table 36 describes the I/O status indicators on FLEX 5000 analog input modules.
Table 36 - I/O Status Indicators - FLEX 5000 Analog Input Modules
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
Complete one of the following:
• None - If your application does not use the input channel.
• If you expect the module to be powered but it is not, complete
the following:
One of the following conditions exists: – Confirm that the system is powered.
• The module is not powered. – Confirm that the module is installed properly.
Off • The module is powered but no connection from the controller to • If the module is powered but the channel is not operating as expected,
module has been established. use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application to confirm that the
• The module is powered, but the input channel is disabled. channel is not disabled and has a connection to the controller.
The Connection category in the Module Properties for the module
indicates if the module is running or faulted. If the module is faulted,
the Connection category indicates error information affecting the
state of the module.
Steady yellow The input channel is operating normally. None
Complete one of the following:
An issue has occurred that is internal to the module. The following are • If the indicator is in the steady red state following the initial power-up
example issues that can cause the status indicator to be steady red: sequence and remains in that state, replace the module.
• The module has experienced a non-recoverable fault. • If a calibration fault occurred, cycle power to the module. When the
power-up sequence completes, the channel returns to the factory
• There is no SA power to the module, or SA power voltage is not in the calibration setting.
valid range (18…32V).
• If the indicator remains in the steady red state after you cycle power,
• Standard modules: A calibration fault occurred on the channel. replace the module.
Steady red • Standard modules: The module is operating over its specified • To return the module to the specified operating temperature range,
temperature. That is, an Over Temperature condition exists. check the temperature at the module installation location and lower it
• Safety modules: When a non-recoverable fault happens on one if necessary.
channel, the other channel in the same channel group will show • Check the wiring at the SA terminals to make sure 24V DC power is
non-recoverable fault as well. present and in the valid range (18…32V). If 24V DC power is not
• Safety modules: For a 5094-IRT8S module operating in TC mode, if the present, troubleshoot the SA power connection.
input voltage is out of range, negative voltages, it can cause the • Module specifications, for example, acceptable operating temperature
channel enter to non-recoverable fault state. or applied current levels, are available in the FLEX 5000 Module
Specifications Technical Data, publication 5094-TD001.
One of the following conditions exists: Complete one of the following:
• The input signal is overrange or underrange. • Check the input signal to determine if it is overrange or underrange.
• The signal range is set in your Studio 5000 Logix Designer application • If so, make changes to return the input signal to within the range
project. limits.
Flashing red
• An Open Wire condition, that is, a wire is disconnected from the input • Check the wiring at the input channel.
channel.
• If necessary, reconnect the wire.
• Standard modules: An over temperature warning is present on the
channel. • Locate and correct the cause of over temperature warning.
Finish the calibration process in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Alternating yellow/red Calibration is in progress. application.

122 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

FLEX 5000 Analog Output Figure 9 shows the status indicators on FLEX 5000 analog output modules.
Modules Status Indicators Figure 9 - FLEX 5000 Analog Output Module Status Indicators
5094-OF8, 5094-OF8XT

FLEX 5000 I/O

®
POWER STATUS

Module status indicator

SA power status indicator

5094-OF8 ANALOG 8 OUTPUT 3 1 TB3

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I/O status indicators

Output Channel 0 (O00)

Output Channel 4 (O04)

Output Channel 7 (O07)

Output Channel 2 (O02)

Output Channel 3 (O03)

Output Channel 5 (O05)

Output Channel 6 (O06)

Output Channel 1 (O01)

Table 37 describes the I/O status indicators on FLEX 5000 analog output modules.
Table 37 - I/O Status Indicators - FLEX 5000 Analog Output Modules
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
Complete one of the following:

• None - If your application does not use the output channel.

• If you expect the module to be powered but it is not, complete
the following:
One of the following conditions exists: – Confirm that the system is powered.
• The module is not powered. – Confirm that the module is installed properly.
Off • The module is powered but no connection from the controller to • If the module is powered but the channel is not operating as
module was ever established. expected, use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application to confirm
• The module is powered, but the output channel is disabled. that the channel is not disabled and has a connection to the
controller.
The Connection category in the Module Properties for the module
indicates if the module is running or faulted. If the module is faulted,
the Connection category indicates error information affecting the
state of the module.
Steady yellow The output channel is operating normally. No action necessary.
Complete one of the following:
• If the indicator is in the steady red state following the initial power-up
sequence and remains in that state, replace the module.
• If a calibration fault occurred, cycle power to the module. When the
power-up sequence completes, the channel returns to the factory
An issue has occurred that is internal to the module. The following are calibration setting.
example issues that can cause the status indicator to be steady red: • If the indicator remains in the steady red state after you cycle power,
• The module has experienced a non-recoverable fault. replace the module.
Steady red • To return the module to the specified operating temperature range,
• A calibration fault occurred on the channel.
• The module is operating over its specified temperature. That is, an complete the following:
Over Temperature condition exists. – Check the temperature at the module installation location and
lower it if necessary.
– Make sure the proper level of current is applied to the module. If
not, change the current applied to an acceptable level.
Module specifications, for example, acceptable operating
temperature or applied current levels, are available in the FLEX 5000
Module Specifications Technical Data, publication 5094-TD001.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 123

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Table 37 - I/O Status Indicators - FLEX 5000 Analog Output Modules (Continued)
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
One of the following:
One of the following conditions exists:
• Check the wiring at the output channel.
• A wire is disconnected from the output. That is, a No Load condition
exists. • If necessary, reconnect the wire.
• The module is driving a current from the channel greater than the • Troubleshoot the application to make sure an acceptable level of
Flashing red maximum current level the channel can handle. That is, a Short Circuit current is driven from the channel.
condition exists. • Locate and correct the cause of SSV Over Current.
• An SSV Over Current condition exists. • Locate and correct the cause of over temperature warning.
• An over temperature warning is present on the channel. • Check the wiring at the SA terminals to make sure 24V DC power is
• There is no SA power to the module. present.
If 24V DC power is not present, troubleshoot the SA power connection.
Finish the calibration process in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
Alternating yellow/red Calibration is in progress. application.

Use the Studio 5000 Logix In addition to the status indicator display on the module, the Studio 5000 Logix Designer
application indicates the presence of fault conditions.
Designer Application for
Troubleshooting Fault conditions are reported in the following ways:
• Warning Signal in the I/O Configuration Tree
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules • Status and Fault Information in Module Properties Categories
5094 Safety I/O Modules • Studio 5000 Logix Designer Application Tag Editor

Warning Signal in the I/O Configuration Tree

As shown in Figure 10, a warning icon appears in the I/O Configuration tree when a fault
occurs.
Figure 10 - Warning Signal in Controller Organizer

Status and Fault Information in Module Properties Categories

The Module Properties section in the Studio 5000 Logix Designer applications includes a series
of categories. The number and types of categories varies by module type.

Each category includes options to configure the module or monitor the module’s current
status. The following are ways to monitor a module’s state for faults:
• Module Status on General Category
• Module Fault Descriptions on Connection Category
• Module Fault Descriptions on Module Info Category
• Module Diagnostics Dialog Box
• Channel Diagnostics

124 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Module Status on General Category

As shown in Figure 11, the status of a module is indicated on the General category of the
Modules Properties.
Figure 11 - Fault Message in Status Line

Module Fault Descriptions on Connection Category

As shown in Figure 12, a module fault description that includes an error code associated with
the specific fault type is listed on the Connection category.
Figure 12 - Fault Description with Error Code

Module Fault Descriptions on Module Info Category

As shown in Figure 13, major and minor fault information is listed on the Module Info category.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 125

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Figure 13 - Major and Minor Fault Information

Module Diagnostics Dialog Box

Module Diagnostics are accessible from the Module Properties dialog box, as shown in
Figure 14.
Figure 14 - Module Diagnostics

Channel Diagnostics

You can use diagnostics in a Studio 5000 Logix Designer project to monitor channel operating
conditions and to troubleshoot issues that affect a channel. You can use diagnostics only
when the project is online.

126 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Channel diagnostics provide information on an individual channel basis. To open the channel
diagnostics, select Diagnostics…
Figure 15 - Channel Diagnostics

Studio 5000 Logix Designer Application Tag Editor

Figure 16 shows how fault conditions are indicated in the controller tags for the module.
Figure 16 - Fault Indication in Controller Tags

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 127

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Notes:

128 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix B
Module Tag Definitions
Applies to these modules:
5094 Standard I/O Modules Module tags are created when you add a module to the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application
5094 Safety I/O Modules project.

The set of module tags associated with a module depends on the module type and Module
Definition choices made during module configuration. For example, if you use a Listen Only
Connection in the Module Definition, the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application creates only
Input tags for that module.

The following types of tags are available with FLEX 5000 analog I/O modules:
• Configuration
• Input
• Output

The tables contained in this section list all of the tags available with a module. Not all tags in
the list are used when that module type is added to a project. Tag use varies by module
configuration.

Tag Name Conventions The module tag names use defined naming conventions. The conventions are as follows:

Example tag name = Adapter:1:I.Ch00.Data

• Adapter = name of the FLEX 5000 EtherNet/IP adapter in the FLEX 5000 I/O system
• 1 = slot number
• I = tag type
• The possible FLEX 5000 analog I/O tag types are C (configuration), I (input), and O
(output).
• Ch00 = module channel number
• Data = tag function
In this case, Data represents the input data returned to the owner-controller.

Access the Tags You view tags from the Tag Editor.
1. Open your Studio 5000 Logix Designer application project.
2. Right-click Controller Tags and choose Monitor Tags.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 129

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

3. Open the tags as necessary to view specific tags.

5094-IF8 Module Tags This section describes the tags associated with the 5094-IF8 module.

Configuration Tags
Table 38 describes the 5094-IF8 module configuration tags.
Table 38 - 5094-IF8 Module - Configuration Tags
Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 0 = -10…10V
• 1 = 0…5V
Chxx.Range SINT Channel’s operating range • 2 = 0…10V
• 4 = 0…20 mA
• 5 = 4…20 mA
• 0 = 5 Hz
• 1 = 10 Hz
• 2 = 15 Hz
• 3 = 20 Hz
• 4 = 50 Hz
• 5 = 60 Hz
• 6 = 100 Hz
• 7 = 200 Hz
Chxx.NotchFilter SINT Notch Filter removes line noise for the channel. • 8 = 500 Hz
• 9 = 1,000 Hz
• 10 = 2,500 Hz
• 11 = 5,000 Hz
• 12 = 10,000 Hz
• 13 = 15,625 Hz
• 14 = 25,000 Hz
• 15 = 31,250 Hz
• 16 = 62,500 Hz
Disables all alarms on the channel.
IMPORTANT: Consider the following:
• When if you change this tag to 0, that is, so alarms are
not disabled, you must also enable the individual
alarms for them to work.
For example, if you want to use the Low Low alarm for • 0 = Alarms are enabled
Chxx.AlarmDisable BOOL a channel, you must set the Chxx.AlarmDisable to 0
and set the Chxx.LLAlarmEn output tag to 1 so the • 1 = Alarms are disabled (default)
alarm is enabled.
This applies to all alarms on the module.
• Conversely, if you set this tag to 1, alarms are disabled
regardless of the setting on the alarm enable tag for
any alarm.
Configures Process alarms to latch until they are
explicitly unlatched.
The Process alarms include:
• HighHigh alarm • 0 = Latching disabled (default)
Chxx.ProcessAlarmLatchEn BOOL
• High alarm • 1 = Latching enabled
• Low alarm
• LowLow alarm
Configures the Rate alarm to latch until it is explicitly • 0 = Latching disabled (default)
Chxx.RateAlarmLatchEn BOOL unlatched. • 1 = Latching enabled

130 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 38 - 5094-IF8 Module - Configuration Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Disabled (default)
Chxx.OpenWireEn BOOL Enable the input Open Wire diagnostic
• 1 = Enabled
Disables the channel.
When a channel is disabled, the following occurs: • 0 = Channel is enabled (default)
Chxx.Disable BOOL • The I/O status indicator for the channel turns off. • 1 = Channel is disabled
• The Chxx.Fault input tag is set to 1.
Offset used to linearize a 10 Ω copper sensor type’s
Chxx.TenOhmOffset INT -1.00 to 1.00 Ω
input
A non-zero value enables the filter, providing a time 0 = Filter is turned off.
Chxx.DigitalFilter INT constant in milliseconds used in a first order lag filter to Any value greater than zero = Filter value in
smooth the input signal. milliseconds
Current applications - Any value less than the
high signal in range.
• 0 = default for 0…20 mA range
One of four points used in scaling. The low signal is in • 4 = default for 4…20 mA
Chxx.LowSignal REAL terms of the inputs signal units and corresponds to the
low engineering term when scaled. Voltage applications - Any value less than the
high signal in range.
• -10 = default for -10…10V range
• 0 = default for 0…5V and 0…10V ranges
Current applications - Any value greater than the
low signal in range.
• 20 = default for either current input range
One of four points used in scaling. The high signal is in
Chxx.HighSignal REAL terms of the inputs signal units and corresponds to the Voltage applications - Any value greater than the
high engineering term when scaled. low signal in range.
• 10 = default for 0…10V and -10…10V ranges
• 5 = default for 0…5V range
Any value less than the high engineering value.
One of four points used in scaling. The low engineering • Current applications: 0.0 = default
helps determine the engineering units the signal values
Chxx.LowEngineering REAL scale into. The low engineering term corresponds to the • Voltage applications: Low signal = default. For
low signal value. example, with the -10…10V range, the default =
-10.
Any value greater than the low engineering value.
One of four points used in scaling. The high engineering • Current applications: 100.0 = default
helps determine the engineering units the signal values
Chxx.HighEngineering REAL scale into. The high engineering term corresponds to the • Voltage applications: High signal = default. For
high signal value. example, with the -10…10V range, the default =
10.
The Low Low alarm trigger point. Causes the
Chxx.LLAlarm to trigger when the input signal moves
Chxx.LLAlarmLimit REAL 0.0 = Default
beneath the configured trigger point. In terms of
engineering units.
The Low alarm trigger point. Causes the ChxxLAlarm to
Chxx.LAlarmLimit REAL trigger when the input signal moves beneath the 0.0 = Default
configured trigger point. In terms of engineering units.
The High alarm trigger point. Causes the ChxxHAlarm to
Chxx.HAlarmLimit REAL trigger when the input signal moves above the 100.0 = Default
configured trigger point. In terms of engineering units.
The High High alarm trigger point. Causes the
ChxxHHAlarm to trigger when the input signal moves
Chxx.HHAlarmLimit REAL 100.0 = Default
above the configured trigger point. In terms of
engineering units.
The Rate alarm trigger point. Causes the ChxxRateAlarm
to trigger when the input signal changes at a rate faster 0 = Rate Alarm is not used
Chxx.RateAlarmLimit REAL than the configured rate alarm. Configured in Any value greater than zero = Trigger point
Engineering Units per second.
Allows a process alarm to remain set, despite the alarm
condition disappearing, as long as the input data
remains within the deadband of the process alarm.
The deadband value is subtracted from the High and Any non-negative value
Chxx.AlarmDeadband REAL High High Alarm Limits to calculate the deadband 0 = Default
thresholds for these alarms. The deadband value is
added to the Low and Low Low Alarm Limits to calculate
the deadband thresholds for these alarms.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 131

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Input Tags
Table 39 describes the 5094-IF8 module input tags.
Table 39 - 5094-IF8 Module - Input Tags
Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Channel’s operating state
• 1 = Run
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the
module is not connected, it changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the
DiagnosticActive BOOL • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the
prognostics threshold is reached.
prognostics threshold is reached
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition
is detected, and when a distinct diagnostic condition -128…127
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT transitions from detected to not detected. The value of 0 is skipped except during module
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from power-up.
255 (-1) to 1 skipping zero.
• 0 = Good
• 1 = Bad, causing fault
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be The typical causes of a fault are the following:
trusted for use in the application. – Channel is disabled
If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to – Open Wire (input modules) or No Load
Chxx.Fault BOOL correct the cause of the inaccuracy. (output modules) condition
IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to – Underrange/Overrange condition
change to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to 0. – Short Circuit condition
We recommend that you first troubleshoot the
module to see if the typical causes exist.
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Uncertain data
The typical causes of uncertain data are the
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but following:
the degree of inaccuracy is not known. – Data signal slightly outside the channel
If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to operating range
Chxx.Uncertain BOOL correct the cause of the inaccuracy. – The channel is slightly over temperature.
IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to – Invalid sensor offset value
change to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to 0. – Calibration fault on the channel
– Calibration is in process on the channel
We recommend that you first troubleshoot the
module to see if the typical causes exist.
• 0 = Open Wire condition does not exist or Open
Wire Detection is disabled
The signal wire is disconnected from the channel or the
Chxx.OpenWire BOOL • 1 = Open Wire condition exists. That is, a signal
RTB is removed from the module.
wire is disconnected from the channel or the
RTB is removed from the module.
Module is higher temperature than its operating limits.
• If this tag is set to 1 but a fault does not exist on the • 0 = Module temperature is not over the
channel, this tag is only an indication of operating operating limits
Chxx.OverTemperature BOOL conditions but the channel is functioning. • 1 = Module temperature is over the operating
• If this tag is set to 1 and a fault exists on the channel, limits
the channel is not functioning.
• 0 = Field Power is present
Chxx.FieldPowerOff BOOL Field power is not present at the channel.
• 1 = Field Power is not present
• 0 = Last channel data received was a number
Indicates if the last received channel data was not a
Chxx.NotANumber BOOL • 1 = Last channel data received was not a
number.
number
Indicates the channel data is beneath the underrange • 0 = Channel data is not beneath the
threshold for this channel. underrange threshold
Chxx.Underrange BOOL For example, when the channel operates in the 4…20 mA
input range, the underrange threshold on the channel is • 1 = Channel data is beneath the underrange
< 3.0 mA. If the input signal is 0 mA, this tag is set to 1. threshold
Indicates the channel data is above the overrange • 0 = Channel data is not above the overrange
threshold for this channel. threshold
Chxx.Overrange BOOL For example, when the channel operates in the 4…20 mA
output range, the overrange threshold on the channel is • 1 = Channel data is above the overrange
> 23.0 mA. If the input signal is 24 mA, this tag is set to 1. threshold

132 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 39 - 5094-IF8 Module - Input Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Triggered when the input data value is less than the Low
Low alarm value.
If latching is enabled, this alarm remains triggered until • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.LLAlarm BOOL unlatched. If latching is not enabled, the alarm clears • 1 = Alarm is triggered
after the input data value is greater than the Low Low
limit and the Alarm Deadband.
Triggered when the input data value is less than the Low
alarm value.
If latching is enabled, this alarm remains triggered until • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.LAlarm BOOL unlatched. If latching is not enabled, the alarm clears • 1 = Alarm is triggered
after the input data value is greater than the Low limit
and the Alarm Deadband.
Triggered when the input data value is greater than the
High alarm value.
If latching is enabled, this alarm remains triggered until • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.HAlarm BOOL unlatched. If latching is not enabled, the alarm clears • 1 = Alarm is triggered
after the input data value is less than the High limit and
the Alarm Deadband.
Triggered when the input data value is greater than the
High High alarm value.
If latching is enabled, this alarm remains triggered until • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.HHAlarm BOOL unlatched. If latching is not enabled, the alarm clears • 1 = Alarm is triggered
after the input data value is less than the High High limit
and the Alarm Deadband.
Triggered when the change between consecutive
channel samples divided by the period of time between • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.RateAlarm BOOL when the samples were taken exceeds the Rate Alarm. • 1 = Alarm is triggered
If latched, this tag remains set until it is unlatched.
Indicates the last attempted Calibration for this
channel failed or there is no calibration data present. • 0 = Calibration did not fail
Chxx.CalFault BOOL This tag is cleared, that is, set to 0, when power is cycled • 1 = Calibration failed
to the module.
• 0 = Channel is not being calibrated
Chxx.Calibrating BOOL Indicates the channel is currently being calibrated.
• 1 = Channel is being calibrated
Indicates that a valid Low Reference signal has been
sampled on this channel.
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the • 0 = Valid Low Reference signal has not been
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module sampled on this channel
Chxx.CalGoodLowRef BOOL Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag • 1 = Valid Low Reference signal has been
does not appear in the module tags. sampled on this channel
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80.
Indicates that an invalid Low Reference signal has been
sampled on this channel.You must correct this condition
to successfully calibrate the module.
If calibration is aborted with an invalid Low Reference
signal, the Chxx.CalFault tag is set for this channel until • 0 = Invalid Low Reference signal has not been
a successful calibration is performed. sampled on this channel
Chxx.CalBadLowRef BOOL IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the • 1 = Invalid Low Reference signal has been
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module sampled on this channel
Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag
does not appear in the module tags.
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Indicates that a valid High Reference signal has been
sampled on this channel.
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the • 0 = Valid High Reference signal has not been
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module sampled on this channel
Chxx.CalGoodHighRef BOOL Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag • 1 = Valid High Reference signal has been
does not appear in the module tags. sampled on this channel
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 133

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 39 - 5094-IF8 Module - Input Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Indicates that an invalid High Reference signal has been
sampled on this channel.
You must correct this condition to successfully calibrate
the module.
If calibration is aborted with an invalid High Reference • 0 = Invalid High Reference signal has not been
signal, the Chxx.CalFault tag is set for this channel until sampled on this channel
Chxx.CalBadHighRef BOOL a successful calibration is performed.
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the • 1 = Invalid High Reference signal has been
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module sampled on this channel
Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag
does not appear in the module tags.
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Indicates calibration on this channel is complete and the
Calibrating state has been exited.
This tag remains set after valid calibration as long as • 0 = Calibration was not successful
connection is open.
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the • 1 = One of the following:
Chxx.CalSuccessful BOOL – Calibration was successful and calibrating
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module
Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag state has been exited.
does not appear in the module tags. – Calibration data is present and applied.
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Chxx.Data REAL Channel data in scaled Engineering Units. Any positive or negative value.
Continuously-running 15-bit timer that counts in
milliseconds.
Whenever an input module scans its channels, it also
records the value of RollingTimestamp at that time.
Chxx.RollingTimestamp INT 0 …32767
The user program can then use the last two
RollingTimestamp values and calculate the interval
between receipt of data or the time when new data has
been received.

Output Tags
Table 40 describes the 5094-IF8 module output tags.
Table 40 - 5094-IF8 Module - Output Tags
Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Enables the Low Low alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.LLAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.
Enables the Low alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.LAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.
Enables the High alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.HAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.
Enables the High High alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.HHAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.

134 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 40 - 5094-IF8 Module - Output Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Enables the Rate alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.RateAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.
Unlatches a latched Low Low Alarm at the first instance • 0 = Low Low Alarm remains latched
Chxx.LLAlarmUnlatch BOOL of the bit transitioning from 0 to 1. • 1 = Low Low Alarm unlatches
Unlatches a latched Low Alarm at the first instance of • 0 = Low Alarm remains latched
Chxx.LAlarmUnlatch BOOL the bit transition from 0 to 1. • 1 = Low Alarm unlatches
Unlatches a latched High Alarm at the first instance of • 0 = High Alarm remains latched
Chxx.HAlarmUnlatch BOOL the bit transition from 0 to 1. • 1 = High Alarm unlatches
Unlatches a set High High Alarm at the first instance of • 0 = High High Alarm remains latched
Chxx.HHAlarmUnlatch BOOL the bit transition from 0 to 1. • 1 = High High Alarm unlatches
Unlatches a set Rate Alarm at the first instance of the bit • 0 = Rate Alarm remains latched
Chxx.RateAlarmUnlatch BOOL transition from 0 to 1. • 1 = Rate Alarm unlatches
Initiates the Calibration process.
This tag must remain set until a valid Low Reference and • 0 = Calibration process is not started
Chxx.Calibrate BOOL High Reference values are applied to the input.
If the tag value transitions to 0 before calibration is • 1 = Calibration process is started
finished, the process stops and calibration fails.
Rising edge triggers the Low Calibration at the Low
Reference Point for the current input range value.
A valid Low Reference signal must be connected to the • 0 = Channel data value has not passed the Low
channel before setting this tag. Reference Point value for the current
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the InputRange tag value
Chxx.CalLowRef BOOL Data with Calibration connection type in the Module • 1 = Channel data value has passed the Low
Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag Reference Point value for the current
does not appear in the module tags. InputRange tag value
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Rising edge triggers a High Calibration at the High
Reference Point for the current input range value.
A valid High Reference signal must be connected to the • 0 = Channel data value has not passed the
channel before setting tag. High Reference Point for the current
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the InputRange tag value
Chxx.CalHighRef BOOL Data with Calibration connection type in the Module • 1 = Channel data value has passed the High
Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag Reference Point for the current InputRange tag
does not appear in the module tags. value
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Compensates for any known offset error on the sensor Any valid float value
or channel to which the sensor is connected. In terms of (We recommend that you use a value in the
Chxx.SensorOffset REAL engineering units.
The value of this tag is added to the measured value in channel’s operating range.)
engineering units and is used in the Chxx.Data input tag. 0.0 = Default

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 135

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

5094-IY8 Module Tags This section describes the tags associated with the 5094-IY8 module.

Configuration Tags
Table 41 describes the 5094-IY8 module configuration tags.
Table 41 - 5094-IY8 Module - Configuration Tags
Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
If this tag set to 1, the embedded Cold Junction
measurement is not used when the module calculates
the compensation.
There is a CJC embedded in each input channels.
Consider the following: • 0 = Cold junction measurement is used to
calculate CJ compensation
CJChxx.Disable BOOL • If you enable each CJChxx without remote CJ channel,
it can be used as CJ measurement for the • 1 = Cold junction measurement is not used to
corresponding input channel. calculate CJ compensation
• If you disable CJChxx measurement, it is assumed
that the cold junction temperature is 0 in the CJ
compensation.
Indicates if the cold junction sensor is mounted on a
remote termination block when set, rather than the
embedded CJ in each channel. If the cold junction • 0 = Cold junction sensor is not mounted on a
sensor is mounted on remote termination block, the remote termination block
CJChxx.Remote BOOL module uses the respective remote CJC measurement
on the chosen channel to calculate the CJC • 1 = Cold junction sensor is mounted on a
compensation. remote termination block
Only one channel can be assigned as a remote CJ
channel.
CJChxx.RemoteCJChannel Shows the remote termination input channel number.
Offset added directly to the measured CJ temperature.
CJChxx.SensorOffset REAL Used to compensate for cold junction temperature Any
sensor error.
• 0 = -10…10V
• 1 = 0…5V
• 2 = 0…10V
• 4 = 0…20 mA
• 5 = 4…20 mA
• 6 = -100...100 mV
• 7 = unused
• 8 = 1…500 Ω 2-wire
• 9 = 2…1,000 Ω 2-wire
• 10 = 4…2,000 Ω 2-wire
Chxx.Range SINT Channel’s operating range • 11 = 8…4,000 Ω 2-wire
• 12 = 1…500 Ω 3-wire
• 13 = 2…1,000 Ω 3-wire
• 14 = 4…2,000 Ω 3-wire
• 15 = 8…4,000 Ω 3-wire
• If the input type is Thermocouple/RTD, the
additional values below are included.
• 16 = 1…500 Ω 4-wire
• 17 = 2…1,000 Ω 4-wire
• 18 = 4…2,000 Ω 4-wire
• 19 = 8…4,000 Ω 4-wire

136 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 41 - 5094-IY8 Module - Configuration Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
RTD Mode:
• 0 = no linearization, Ω
(if “Remote termination” is used as the input
channel, this value is not shown)
• 1 = 100 Ω Platinum 385
• 2 = 200 Ω Platinum 385
• 3 = 500 Ω Platinum 385
• 4 = 1000 Ω Platinum 385
• 5 = 100 Ω Platinum 3916
• 6 = 200 Ω Platinum 3916
• 7 = 500 Ω Platinum 3916
• 8 = 1000 Ω Platinum 3916
• 9 = 10 Ω Copper 427
• 10 = 120 Ω Nickel 672
• 11 = 100 Ω Nickel 618
• 12 = 120 Ω Nickel 618
• 13 = 200 Ω Nickel 618
Chxx.SensorType SINT
• 14 = 500 Ω Nickel 618

• Thermocouple Mode:
• 0 = mV
(if “Remote termination” is used as the input
channel, this value is not shown)
• 1=B
• 2=C
• 3=E
• 4=J
• 5=K
• 6=N
• 7=R
• 8=S
• 9=T
• 10 = TXK/XK (L)
• 11 = D
• 0 = 5 Hz
• 1 = 10 Hz
• 2 = 15 Hz
• 3 = 20 Hz
• 4 = 50 Hz
• 5 = 60 Hz
• 6 = 100 Hz
• 7 = 200 Hz
Chxx.NotchFilter SINT Notch Filter removes line noise for the channel. • 8 = 500 Hz
• 9 = 1,000 Hz
• 10 = 2,500 Hz
• 11 = 5,000 Hz
• 12 = 10,000 Hz
• 13 = 15,625 Hz
• 14 = 25,000 Hz
• 15 = 31,250 Hz
• 16 = 62,500 Hz
Disables all alarms on the channel.
IMPORTANT: Consider the following:
• When if you change this tag to 0, that is, so alarms are
not disabled, you must also enable the individual
alarms for them to work.
For example, if you want to use the Low Low alarm for • 0 = Alarms are enabled
Chxx.AlarmDisable BOOL a channel, you must set the Chxx.AlarmDisable to 0
and set the Chxx.LLAlarmEn output tag to 1 so the • 1 = Alarms are disabled (default)
alarm is enabled.
This applies to all alarms on the module.
• Conversely, if you set this tag to 1, alarms are disabled
regardless of the setting on the alarm enable tag for
any alarm.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 137

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 41 - 5094-IY8 Module - Configuration Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Configures Process alarms to latch until they are
explicitly unlatched.
The Process alarms include:
• HighHigh alarm • 0 = Latching disabled (default)
Chxx.ProcessAlarmLatchEn BOOL
• High alarm • 1 = Latching enabled
• Low alarm
• LowLow alarm
Configures the Rate alarm to latch until it is explicitly • 0 = Latching disabled (default)
Chxx.RateAlarmLatchEn BOOL unlatched. • 1 = Latching enabled
• 0 = Disabled (default)
Chxx.OpenWireEn BOOL Enable the input Open Wire diagnostic
• 1 = Enabled
• 0 = Channel is enabled (default)
Chxx.Disable BOOL Disables the channel.
• 1 = Channel is disabled
• 0 = Analog input and analog common ground
are opened (default) (For use with RTD,
Select when using 2-wire current transmitter that is thermocouple, or transmitters (V/I output)
powered from Sensor Source Voltage (SSV). This shorts that are powered by an external power
Chxx.InputSSVSwitchEn BOOL the analog input channel and analog common ground to source)
avoid the need to install an additional jumper wire on the
terminal. • 1 = Analog input and analog common ground
are shorted (For use with 2-wire current
transmitter that are powered from SSV)
Chxx.TenOhmOffset INT Offset used to linearize a 10 Ω copper sensor type’s input -1.00…1.00 Ω
A non-zero value enables the filter, providing a time
Chxx.DigitalFilter INT constant in milliseconds used in a first order lag filter to All positive values
smooth the input signal.
• Current input type - Any value less than the
high signal in range.
– 0 = default for 0…20 mA range
– 4 = default for 4…20 mA

• Voltage input type- Any value less than the

high signal in range.
– -10 = default for -10…10V range
– 0 = default for 0…5V and 0…10V ranges

• RTD input type - By default, this tag value is

the lowest temperature supported by the
One of four points used in scaling. The low signal is in Sensor Type connected to the channel.
Chxx.LowSignal REAL terms of the inputs signal units and corresponds to the You can change the value, if necessary. The
low engineering term when scaled. value is always Celsius units.
For a list of the temperature values
associated with each RTD input sensor type,
see Table 18.

• Thermocouple input type - By default, this

tag value is the lowest temperature supported
by the Thermocouple type connected to the
channel.
The value is always in Celsius units.
For a list of the temperature values
associated with each Thermocouple input
sensor type, see Table 18.

138 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 41 - 5094-IY8 Module - Configuration Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• Current input type - Any value greater than
the low signal in range.
– 20 = default for either current input range
• Voltage input type - Any value greater than
the low signal in range.
– 10 = default for 0…10V and -10…10V ranges
– 5 = default for 0…5V range

• RTD input type - By default, this tag value is

the highest temperature supported by the
Sensor Type connected to the channel.
One of four points used in scaling. The high signal is in You can change the value, if necessary. The
Chxx.HighSignal REAL terms of the inputs signal units and corresponds to the value is always Celsius units.
high engineering term when scaled. For a list of the temperature values
associated with each RTD input sensor type,
see Table 18.

• Thermocouple input type - By default, the

tag value is the highest temperature
supported by the Thermocouple type
connected to the channel.
You can change the value, if necessary. The
value is always in Celsius units.
For a list of the temperature values
associated with each Thermocouple input
sensor type, see Table 18.
Any value less than the high engineering value.
• Current input type: 0.0 = default
• Voltage input type: Low signal = default. For
example, with the
-10…10V range, the default = -10.
• RTD input type - By default, the tag value is
the lowest temperature supported by the
Sensor Type connected to the channel.
You can change the value, if necessary. The
engineering units value matches the
One of four points used in scaling. The low engineering Temperature Units that you choose.
helps determine the engineering units the signal values For a list of the temperature values
Chxx.LowEngineering REAL scale into. The low engineering term corresponds to the associated with each RTD input sensor type,
low signal value. see Table 18.
• Thermocouple input type - By default, the
tag value is the lowest temperature supported
by the Thermocouple type connected to the
channel.
You can change the value, if necessary. The
engineering units value matches the
Temperature Units that you choose.
For a list of the temperature values
associated with each Thermocouple input
sensor type, see Table 18.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 139

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 41 - 5094-IY8 Module - Configuration Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Any value greater than the low engineering
value.
• Current input type: 100.0 = default
• Voltage input type: High signal = default. For
example, with the -10…10V range, the default
= 10.
• RTD input type - By default, the tag value is
the highest temperature supported by the
Sensor Type connected to the channel.
You can change the value, if necessary. The
One of four points used in scaling. The high engineering engineering units value matches the
helps determine the engineering units the signal values Temperature Units that you choose.
Chxx.HighEngineering REAL scale into. The high engineering term corresponds to the For a list of the temperature values
high signal value. associated with each RTD input sensor type,
see Table 18.
• Thermocouple input type - By default, the
tag value is the highest temperature
supported by the Thermocouple type
connected to the channel.
You can change the value, if necessary. The
engineering units value matches the
Temperature Units that you choose.
For a list of the temperature values
associated with each Thermocouple input
sensor type, see Table 18.
The Low Low alarm trigger point. Causes the
ChxxLLAlarm to trigger when the input signal moves
Chxx.LLAlarmLimit REAL 0.0 = default
beneath the configured trigger point. In terms of
engineering units.
The Low alarm trigger point. Causes the ChxxLAlarm to
Chxx.LAlarmLimit REAL trigger when the input signal moves beneath the 0.0 = default
configured trigger point. In terms of engineering units.
The High alarm trigger point. Causes the ChxxHAlarm to
Chxx.HAlarmLimit REAL trigger when the input signal moves above the 100.0 = default
configured trigger point. In terms of engineering units.
The High High alarm trigger point. Causes the
ChxxHHAlarm to trigger when the input signal moves
Chxx.HHAlarmLimit REAL 100.0 = default
above the configured trigger point. In terms of
engineering units.
The Rate alarm trigger point. Causes the ChxxRateAlarm
to trigger when the input signal changes at a rate faster 0…100
Chxx.RateAlarmLimit REAL than the configured rate alarm. Configured in 0 = default
Engineering Units per second.
Allows a process alarm to remain set, despite the alarm
condition disappearing, as long as the input data
remains within the deadband of the process alarm.
The deadband value is subtracted from the High and Any non-negative value
Chxx.AlarmDeadband REAL High High Alarm Limits to calculate the deadband 0 = default
thresholds for these alarms. The deadband value is
added to the Low and Low Low Alarm Limits to calculate
the deadband thresholds for these alarms.

Input Tags
Table 42 describes the 5094-IY8 module input tags.
Table 42 - 5094-IY8 Module - Input Tags
Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Channel’s operating state
• 1 = Run
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the
module is not connected, it changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the
DiagnosticActive BOOL • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the
prognostics threshold is reached.
prognostics threshold is reached

140 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 42 - 5094-IY8 Module - Input Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition
is detected, and when a distinct diagnostic condition -128…+127
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT transitions from detected to not detected. The value of 0 is skipped except during module
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from power-up.
255 (-1) to 1 skipping zero.
• 0 = Good
Indicates that the cold junction data is inaccurate and • 1 = Bad, causing fault
cannot be trusted for use in the application. The typical causes of a fault are the following:
If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to – Channel is disabled
CJChxx.Fault BOOL correct the cause of the inaccuracy. – Open Wire condition
IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to – Underrange/Overrange condition
change to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to – Short Circuit condition
0. We recommend that you first troubleshoot the
module to see if the typical causes exist.
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Uncertain data
Indicates that the cold junction data can be inaccurate The typical causes of uncertain data are the
but the degree of inaccuracy is not known. following:
If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to – Data signal slightly outside the channel
CJChxx.Uncertain BOOL correct the cause of the inaccuracy. operating range
IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to – The channel is slightly over temperature.
change to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to – Invalid sensor offset value
0. – Calibration fault on the channel
– Calibration is in process on the channel
We recommend that you first troubleshoot the
module to see if the typical causes exist.
The cold junction wire is disconnected from the channel
or the RTB is removed from the module. • 0 = Open Wire condition does not exist
If this condition exists, confirm that you are using one of • 1 = Open Wire condition exists. That is, a signal
CJChxx.OpenWire BOOL the following RTBs: wire is disconnected from the channel or the
• 5094-RTB3T RTB is removed from the module.
• 5094-RTB3TS
• 0 = Field Power is present
CJChxx.FieldPowerOff BOOL Field power is present at the cold junction.
• 1 = Field Power is not present
• 0 = Channel data is not beneath the absolute
The cold junction at the channel is below the minimum minimum
CJChxx.Underrange BOOL of its operating range. • 1 = Channel data is beneath the absolute
minimum
• 0 = Channel data is not above the absolute
The cold junction at the channel is above the maximum minimum
CJChxx.Overrange BOOL of its operating range. • 1 = Channel data is above the absolute
minimum
Current temperature of the cold junction in degrees C. Any
CJChxx.Temperature REAL This tag must use Celsius.
• 0 = Good
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be • 1 = Bad, causing fault
trusted for use in the application. The typical causes of a fault are the following:
If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to – Channel is disabled
Chxx.Fault BOOL correct the cause of the inaccuracy. – Open Wire condition
IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to – Underrange/Overrange condition
change to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to – Short Circuit condition
0. We recommend that you first troubleshoot the
module to see if the typical causes exist.
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Uncertain data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but The typical causes of uncertain data are the
the degree of inaccuracy is not known. following:
If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to – Data signal slightly outside the channel
Chxx.Uncertain BOOL correct the cause of the inaccuracy. operating range
IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to – The channel is slightly over temperature.
change to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to – Invalid sensor offset value
0. – Calibration fault on the channel
– Calibration is in process on the channel
We recommend that you first troubleshoot the
module to see if the typical causes exist.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 141

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 42 - 5094-IY8 Module - Input Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Open Wire condition does not exist
The signal wire is disconnected from the channel or the • 1 = Open Wire condition exists. That is, a signal
Chxx.OpenWire BOOL RTB is removed from the module. wire is disconnected from the channel or the
RTB is removed from the module.
Module is higher temperature than its operating limits.
• If this tag is set to 1 but a fault does not exist on the • 0 = Module temperature is not over the
channel, this tag is only an indication of operating operating limits
Chxx.OverTemperature BOOL conditions but the channel is functioning. • 1 = Module temperature is over the operating
• If this tag is set to 1 and a fault exists on the channel, limits
the channel is not functioning.
• 0 = Field Power is present
Chxx.FieldPowerOff BOOL Field power is not present at the channel.
• 1 = Field Power is not present
• 0 = Last channel data received was a number
Indicates if the last received channel data was not a
Chxx.NotANumber BOOL • 1 = Last channel data received was not a
number.
number
Indicates the channel data is beneath the underrange • 0 = Channel data is not beneath the
threshold for this channel. underrange threshold
Chxx.Underrange BOOL For example, when the channel operates in the 4…20 mA
input range, the underrange threshold on the channel is • 1 = Channel data is beneath the underrange
< 3.0 mA. If the input signal is 0 mA, this tag is set to 1. threshold
Indicates the channel data is above the overrange • 0 = Channel data is not above the overrange
threshold for this channel. threshold
Chxx.Overrange BOOL For example, when the channel operates in the 4…20 mA
input range, the overrange threshold on the channel is > • 1 = Channel data is above the overrange
23.0 mA. If the input signal is 24 mA, this tag is set to 1. threshold
Triggered when the input data value is less than the Low
Low alarm value. • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.LLAlarm BOOL If latched, this alarm remains triggered until unlatched • 1 = Alarm is triggered
or if the input data value is within Deadband.
Triggered when the input data value is less than the Low
alarm value. • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.LAlarm BOOL If latched, this alarm remains triggered until unlatched • 1 = Alarm is triggered
or if the input data value is within Deadband.
Triggered when the input data value is greater than the
High alarm value. • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.HAlarm BOOL If latched, this alarm remains triggered until unlatched • 1 = Alarm is triggered
or if the input data value is within Deadband.
Triggered when the input data value is greater than the
High High alarm value. • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.HHAlarm BOOL If latched, this alarm remains triggered until unlatched • 1 = Alarm is triggered
or if the input data value is within Deadband.
Triggered when the change between consecutive
channel samples divided by the period of time between • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.RateAlarm BOOL when the samples were taken exceeds the Rate Alarm. • 1 = Alarm is triggered
If latched, this tag remains set until it is unlatched.
Indicates the last attempted Calibration for this
channel failed. • 0 = Calibration did not fail
Chxx.CalFault BOOL This tag is cleared, that is, set to 0, when power is cycled • 1 = Calibration failed
to the module.
• 0 = Channel is not being calibrated
Chxx.Calibrating BOOL Indicates the channel is currently being calibrated.
• 1 = Channel is being calibrated
Indicates that a valid Low Reference signal has been
sampled on this channel.
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the • 0 = Valid Low Reference signal has not been
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module sampled on this channel
Chxx.CalGoodLowRef BOOL Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag • 1 = Valid Low Reference signal has been
does not appear in the module tags. sampled on this channel
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80

142 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 42 - 5094-IY8 Module - Input Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Indicates that an invalid Low Reference signal has been
sampled on this channel.You must correct this condition
to successfully calibrate the module.
If calibration is aborted with an invalid Low Reference
signal, the Chxx.CalFault tag is set for this channel until • 0 = Invalid Low Reference signal has not been
a successful calibration is performed. sampled on this channel
Chxx.CalBadLowRef BOOL IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the • 1 = Invalid Low Reference signal has been
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module sampled on this channel
Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag
does not appear in the module tags.
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Indicates that a valid High Reference signal has been
sampled on this channel.
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the • 0 = Valid High Reference signal has not been
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module sampled on this channel
Chxx.CalGoodHighRef BOOL Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag • 1 = Valid High Reference signal has been
does not appear in the module tags. sampled on this channel
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Indicates that an invalid High Reference signal has been
sampled on this channel.
You must correct this condition to successfully calibrate
the module.
If calibration is aborted with an invalid High Reference • 0 = Invalid High Reference signal has not been
signal, the Chxx.CalFault tag is set for this channel until sampled on this channel
Chxx.CalBadHighRef BOOL a successful calibration is performed.
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the • 1 = Invalid High Reference signal has been
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module sampled on this channel
Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag
does not appear in the module tags.
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Indicates calibration on this channel is complete and the
Calibrating state has been exited.
This tag remains set after valid calibration as long as
connection is open. • 0 = Calibration was not successful
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the
Chxx.CalSuccessful BOOL • 1 = Calibration was successful and calibrating
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module
Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag state has been exited.
does not appear in the module tags.
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Chxx.Data REAL Channel data in scaled Engineering Units. Any positive or negative value.
Continuously-running 15-bit timer that counts in
milliseconds.
Whenever an input module scans its channels, it also
records the value of RollingTimestamp at that time.
Chxx.RollingTimestamp INT 0 …32767
The user program can then use the last two
RollingTimestamp values and calculate the interval
between receipt of data or the time when new data has
been received.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 143

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Output Tags
Table 43 describes the 5094-IY8 module output tags.
Table 43 - 5094-IY8 Module - Output Tags
Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Enables the Low Low alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.LLAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.
Enables the Low alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.LAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.
Enables the High alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.HAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.
Enables the High High alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.HHAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.
Enables the Rate alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.RateAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.
Unlatches a latched Low Low Alarm at the first instance • 0 = Low Low Alarm remains latched
Chxx.LLAlarmUnlatch BOOL of the bit transitioning from 0 to 1. • 1 = Low Low Alarm unlatches
Unlatches a latched Low Alarm at the first instance of • 0 = Low Alarm remains latched
Chxx.LAlarmUnlatch BOOL the bit transitioning from 0 to 1. • 1 = Low Alarm unlatches
Unlatches a latched High Alarm at the first instance of • 0 = High Alarm remains latched
Chxx.HAlarmUnlatch BOOL the bit transitioning from 0 to 1. • 1 = High Alarm unlatches
Unlatches a set High High Alarm at the first instance of • 0 = High High Alarm remains latched
Chxx.HHAlarmUnlatch BOOL the bit transitioning from 0 to 1. • 1 = High High Alarm unlatches
Unlatches a set Rate Alarm at the first instance of the bit • 0 = Rate Alarm remains latched
Chxx.RateAlarmUnlatch BOOL transitioning from 0 to 1. • 1 = Rate Alarm unlatches
Initiates the Calibration process.
This tag must remain set until a valid Low Reference and • 0 = Calibration process is not started
Chxx.Calibrate BOOL High Reference values are applied to the input.
If the tag value transitions to 0 before calibration is • 1 = Calibration process is started
finished, the process stops and calibration fails.

144 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 43 - 5094-IY8 Module - Output Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Rising edge triggers the Low Calibration at the Low
Reference Point for the current input range value.
A valid Low Reference signal must be connected to the
channel before setting this tag. • 0 = Low Reference Signal is not applied to the
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the RTB
Chxx.CalLowRef BOOL Data with Calibration connection type in the Module
Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag • 1 = Low Reference Signal is applied to RTB
does not appear in the module tags.
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Rising edge triggers a High Calibration at the High
Reference Point for the current input range value.
A valid High Reference signal must be connected to the
channel before setting tag. • 0 = High Reference Signal is not applied to the
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the RTB
Chxx.CalHighRef BOOL Data with Calibration connection type in the Module
Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag • 1 = High Reference Signal is applied to RTB
does not appear in the module tags.
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Compensates for any known offset error on the sensor Any
or channel to which the sensor is connected. In terms of (We recommend that you use a value in the
Chxx.SensorOffset REAL engineering units. channel’s operating range.)
The value of this tag is added to the measured value in 0.0 = default
engineering units and is used in the Chxx.Data input tag.

5094-OF8 Module Tags This section describes the tags associated with the 5094-OF8 module.

Configuration Tags
Table 44 describes the 5094-OF8 module configuration tags.
Table 44 - 5094-OF8 Module - Configuration Tags
Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 0 = -10…+10V
• 1 = 0…5V
Chxx.Range SINT Channel’s operating range • 2 = 0…10V
• 4 = 0…20 mA
• 5 = 4…20 mA
• 0 = Alarms are enabled
Chxx.AlarmDisable BOOL Disables all alarms on the channel.
• 1 = Alarms are disabled (default)
Configures Limit alarms to latch until they are explicitly • 0 = Latching disabled (default)
Chxx.LimitAlarmLatchEn BOOL unlatched. • 1 = Latching enabled
Latches Ramp alarm when set so that does not clear • 0 = Latching disabled (default)
Chxx.RampAlarmLatchEn BOOL until explicitly unlatched. • 1 = Latching enabled
• 0 = Disabled (default)
Chxx.NoLoadEn BOOL Enable the input No Load diagnostic
• 1 = Enabled
• 0 = Channel is enabled (default)
Chxx.Disable BOOL Disables the channel.
• 1 = Channel is disabled
Determines output action when a connection fault
occurs.
At the fault occurrence, the output holds its last state or • 0 = Transition to user-defined value
Chxx.FaultMode BOOL transitions to the value set in the Fault Value parameter. • 1 = Hold Last State (default)
The channel continues the Fault Mode for the length of
time set in the Fault Value State Duration parameter.
Determines output action when the controller transitions
to Program mode or the connection to the module is
inhibited. • 0 = Transition to user-defined value
Chxx.ProgMode BOOL At the transition to Program mode, the output holds its • 1 = Hold Last State (default)
last state or transitions to the value set in the Program
Value parameter.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 145

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 44 - 5094-OF8 Module - Configuration Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Determines channel action if a connection faults while
the module is in a safe state for Program mode. • 0 = Remains in the Program state
The channel can remain in the safe state for Program
Chxx.ProgramToFaultEn BOOL • 1 = Transitions to the safe state for the Fault
mode or transition to a safe state for Fault mode.
If the channel remains in safe state for Program mode, mode
the Final Fault State parameter is ignored.
Enables Output Ramping when the module is in
Run mode. • 0 = Ramping disabled (default)
Chxx.RampInRun BOOL Output changes during Run mode are limited to the • 1 = Ramping enabled in Run mode
Maximum Ramp Rate value.
Enables Output Ramping when the controller transitions
to Program mode. • 0 = Ramping disabled (default)
Chxx.RampToProg BOOL Output changes during Program mode are limited to the • 1 = Ramping enabled to Program mode state
Maximum Ramp Rate value.
Enables Output Ramping when the connection to the
module faults. • 0 = Ramping disabled (default)
Chxx.RampToFault BOOL Output transitions to FaultValue and FaultFinalState are • 1 = Ramping enabled to Fault mode state
limited to the MaximumRampRate.
When set, configures the channel to hold, or not change,
until initialized with a value within 0.1% of full scale of
its current value when one of the following conditions
occurs.
• Module initial connection (power up) • 0= Output O.Chxx.Data signal immediately
Chxx.HoldForInit BOOL
• Controller transition from Program mode back to Run • 1= Hold last signal until initialization match
mode
• Module reestablishes communication after a fault
• SA power is restored after being lost.
Determines the length of time the FaultMode or • 0 = Hold forever (default)
Chxx.FaultValueStateDuration SINT FaultValue parameter value is held prior to the Final • Any of the following:
Fault State. – 1, 2, 5, or 10 seconds
Maximum rate at which the channel can transition to in
Engineering Units/Second. Any value > 0.0
This tag is used only if at least one of the following 1,000,000.00 = default
Chxx.MaxRampRate REAL output ramping modes is enabled:
• Ramp In Run If the MaxRampRate = 0.0, the ramp rate is
• Ramp To Fault limited to ramping the range full scale in one RPI.
• Ramp To Program
Current applications - Any value less than the
high signal in range.
• 0 = default for 0…20 mA range
One of four points used in scaling. The low signal is in • 4 = default for 4…20 mA
Chxx.LowSignal REAL terms of the inputs signal units and corresponds to the
low engineering term when scaled. Voltage applications - Any value less than the
high signal in range.
• -10 = default for -10…10V range
• 0 = default for 0…5V and 0…10V range
Current applications - Any value greater than the
low signal in range.
• 20 = default for either current input range
One of four points used in scaling. The high signal is in
Chxx.HighSignal REAL terms of the inputs signal units and corresponds to the Voltage applications - Any value greater than the
high engineering term when scaled. low signal in range.
• 10 = default for 0…10V and -10…10V ranges
• 5 = default for 0…5V range
Any value less than the high engineering value.
One of four points used in scaling. The low engineering • Current applications: 0.0 = default
helps determine the engineering units the signal values
Chxx.LowEngineering REAL scale into. The low engineering term corresponds to the • Voltage applications: Low signal = default. For
low signal value. example, with the -10…10V range, the default =
-10.
Any value greater than the low engineering value.
One of four points used in scaling. The high engineering • Current applications: 100.0 = default
helps determine the engineering units the signal values
Chxx.HighEngineering REAL scale into. The high engineering term corresponds to the • Voltage applications: High signal = default. For
high signal value. example, with the -10…10V range, the default =
10.
Lowest value to which the output can go based on the Any value lower than the HighLimit
Chxx.LowLimit REAL operating range established by the Output Clamping 0.0 = default
feature. The tag value is engineering units.

146 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 44 - 5094-OF8 Module - Configuration Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Highest value to which the output can go based on the Any value higher than the LowLimit
Chxx.HighLimit REAL operating range established by the Output Clamping 0.0 = default
feature. The tag value is engineering units.
Compensates for any known error on the sensor or Any value (We recommend that you use a small
Chxx.Offset REAL channel to which the sensor is connected. The value is value.)
set in engineering units. 0.0 = default
Value to which the output changes if the following
events exist:
• Fault Mode = 0
Chxx.FaultValue REAL Any value
• Either of the following: 0.0 = default
– Controller is in Run mode and the connection is lost
– Controller is in Program mode, the connection is
lost, and the ProgamToFaultEn tag is set
Value to which the channel changes if the following
events exist: Any value
Chxx.ProgValue REAL • Program Mode = 0 0.0 = default
• Controller transitions to Program mode
Value to which the channel changes if the following
events exist:
• Connection is lost Any value
Chxx.FaultFinalState REAL • Time defined by the FaultValueStateDuration 0.0 = default
parameter has been exceeded
Output transitions to FaultValue and FaultFinalState are
limited to the MaximumRampRate.

Input Tags
Table 45 describes the 5094-OF8 module input tags.
Table 45 - 5094-OF8 Module - Input Tags
Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Channel’s operating state
• 1 = Run
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the
module is not connected, it changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the
DiagnosticActive BOOL • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the
prognostics threshold is reached.
prognostics threshold is reached
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition
is detected, and when a distinct diagnostic condition -128…127
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT transitions from detected to not detected. The value of 0 is skipped except during module
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from power-up.
255 (-1) to 1 skipping zero.
• 0 = Good
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be • 1 = Bad, causing fault
trusted for use in the application. The typical causes of a fault are the following:
If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to – Channel is disabled
Chxx.Fault BOOL – No Load condition
correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to – Underrange/Overrange condition
change to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to 0. – Short Circuit condition
We recommend that you first troubleshoot the
module to see if the typical causes exist.
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Uncertain data
The typical causes of uncertain data are the
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but following:
the degree of inaccuracy is not known. – Data signal slightly outside the channel
If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to operating range
Chxx.Uncertain BOOL correct the cause of the inaccuracy. – The channel is slightly over temperature.
IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to – Invalid sensor offset value
change to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to 0. – Calibration fault on the channel
– Calibration is in process on the channel
We recommend that you first troubleshoot the
module to see if the typical causes exist.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 147

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 45 - 5094-OF8 Module - Input Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
The signal wire is disconnected from the channel or the • 0 = No Load condition does not exist
RTB is removed from the module. • 1 = No Load condition exists. That is, a signal
Chxx.NoLoad BOOL This condition is detected only when the channel is used wire is disconnected from the channel or the
in current mode. RTB is removed from the module.
• 0 = No Short Circuit or Overcurrent condition
A Short Circuit or Overcurrent condition exists. exists
Chxx.ShortCircuit BOOL This condition is detected only when the channel is used
in voltage mode. • 1 = Short Circuit or Overcurrent condition
exists
Module is higher temperature than its operating limits.
• If this tag is set to 1 but a fault does not exist on the • 0 = Module temperature is not over the
channel, this tag is only an indication of operating operating limits
Chxx.OverTemperature BOOL conditions but the channel is functioning. • 1 = Module temperature is over the operating
• If this tag is set to 1 and a fault exists on the channel, limits
the channel is not functioning.
• 0 = Field Power is present
Chxx.FieldPowerOff BOOL Field power is not present at the channel.
• 1 = Field Power is not present
Indicates that the channel is currently holding until the • 0 = Channel is not holding
Chxx.InHold BOOL received data value is within 0.1% range full scale of the
current data value. • 1 = Channel is holding
• 0 = Last channel data received was a number
Indicates that the last value received for the channel
Chxx.NotANumber BOOL • 1 = Last channel data received was not a
output data value was not a number.
number
Indicates the channel data is beneath the underrange
threshold for this channel. • 0 = Channel data is not beneath the
For example, when the channel operates in the 4…20 mA underrange threshold
Chxx.Underrange BOOL output range, the underrange threshold on the channel • 1 = Channel data is beneath the underrange
is < 3.6 mA. If the output signal is 0 mA, this tag is set to threshold
1.
Indicates the channel data is above the overrange • 0 = Channel data is not above the overrange
threshold for this channel. threshold
Chxx.Overrange BOOL For example, when the channel operates in the 4…20 mA
output range, the overrange threshold on the channel is • 1 = Channel data is above the overrange
> 21.0 mA. If the output signal is 21 mA, this tag is set to 1. threshold
Triggered when the requested output value is below the
configured Low Limit value. It remains set until the
requested output is above the Low Limit. • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.LLimitAlarm BOOL If the Chxx.AlarmDisable tag is set to 1, that is, the output • 1 = Alarm is triggered
signal is still clamped at the Low Limit value. But the Low
Limit alarm is not triggered.
Triggered when the requested output value is above the
configured High Limit value. It remains set until the
requested output is below the High Limit. • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.HLimitAlarm BOOL If the Chxx.AlarmDisable tag is set to 1, that is, the output • 1 = Alarm is triggered
signal is still clamped at the High Limit value. But the
High Limit alarm is not triggered.
Indicates that the analog output has been commanded • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.RampAlarm BOOL to change value in a way such that the Maximum Ramp
Rate is exceeded • 1 = Alarm is triggered
Indicates the last attempted Calibration for this
channel failed. • 0 = Calibration did not fail
Chxx.CalFault BOOL This tag is cleared, that is, set to 0, when power is cycled • 1 = Calibration failed
to the module.
• 0 = Channel is not being calibrated
Chxx.Calibrating BOOL Indicates the channel is currently being calibrated.
• 1 = Channel is being calibrated
Indicates that a valid Low Reference measurement was
passed through the output tag to the module.
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the • 0 = Valid Low Reference measurement was
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module not passed to the module
Chxx.CalGoodLowRef BOOL Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag • 1 = Valid Low Reference measurement was
does not appear in the module tags. passed to the module
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80

148 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 45 - 5094-OF8 Module - Input Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Indicates that an invalid Low Reference signal has been
sampled on this channel.You must correct this condition
to successfully calibrate the module.
If calibration is aborted with an invalid Low Reference
signal, the Chxx.CalFault tag is set for this channel until a • 0 = Invalid Low Reference signal has not been
successful calibration is performed. sampled on this channel
Chxx.CalBadLowRef BOOL IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the • 1 = Invalid Low Reference signal has been
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module sampled on this channel
Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag
does not appear in the module tags.
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Indicates that a valid High Reference measurement was
passed through the output tag to the module.
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the • 0 = Valid High Reference measurement was
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module not passed to the module
Chxx.CalGoodHighRef BOOL Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag • 1 = Valid High Reference measurement was
does not appear in the module tags. passed to the module
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Indicates that an invalid High Reference signal has been
sampled on this channel.
You must correct this condition to successfully calibrate
the module.
If calibration is aborted with an invalid High Reference • 0 = Invalid High Reference signal has not been
signal, the Chxx.CalFault tag is set for this channel until a sampled on this channel
Chxx.CalBadHighRef BOOL successful calibration is performed.
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the • 1 = Invalid High Reference signal has been
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module sampled on this channel
Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag
does not appear in the module tags.
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Indicates calibration on this channel is complete and the
Calibrating state has been exited.
This tag remains set after valid calibration as long as
connection is open. • 0 = Calibration was not successful
IMPORTANT: This tag is available only when you use the
Chxx.CalSuccessful BOOL • 1 = Calibration was successful and calibrating
Data with Calibration connection type in the Module
Definition. If you use the Data connection type, this tag state has been exited.
does not appear in the module tags.
For more information on how to define a module, see
Module Definition on page 80
Indicates the signal value currently output at the RTB in
Chxx.Data REAL Any positive or negative value.
scaled Engineering Units.
Continuously-running 15-bit timer that counts in
milliseconds.
Chxx.RollingTimestamp INT 0…32767
Whenever the data echo value changes, the output
module updates the value of the RollingTimestamp.

Output Tags
Table 46 describes the 5094-OF8 module output tags.
Table 46 - 5094-OF8 Module - Output Tags
Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Unlatches a latched Low Limit alarm at the first instance • 0 = Alarm remains latched (default)
Chxx.LLimitAlarmUnlatch BOOL of the bit transitioning from 0 to 1. • 1 = Alarm is unlatched
Unlatches a latched High Limit alarm at the first • 0 = Alarm remains latched (default)
Chxx.HLimitAlarmUnlatch BOOL instance of the bit transitioning from 0 to 1. • 1 = Alarm is unlatched
Unlatches a latched Ramp alarm at the first instance of • 0 = Alarm remains latched (default)
Chxx.RampAlarmUnlatch BOOL the bit transitioning from 0 to 1. • 1 = Alarm is unlatched
Initiates the Calibration process. • 0 = Calibration process is not started (default)
Chxx.Calibrate BOOL This tag must remain set until a valid Low Reference and
High Reference values are applied to the channel. • 1 = Calibration process is started

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 149

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 46 - 5094-OF8 Module - Output Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Do not output Cal Low Reference
A 0 to 1 transition commands the channel to produce the
Chxx.CalOutputLowRef BOOL Low Calibration Reference Point for the chosen current • 1 = Output Calibration Low Reference
or voltage output range. Do not set this tag and the CalOutputHighRef tag
to 1 simultaneously.
• 0 = Do not Output Cal High Reference
A 0 to 1 transition commands the channel to produce the
Chxx.CalOutputHighRef BOOL High Calibration Reference Point for the chosen current • 1 = Output Calibration High Reference Signal
or voltage output range. Do not set this tag and the CalOutputLowRef tag
to 1 simultaneously.
A 0 to 1 transition indicates that the Chxx.Data output tag • 0 = Not sending Recorded Cal Low Ref
Chxx.CalLowRefPassed BOOL data contains the recorded Low Reference value for the • 1 = Sending Recorded Cal Low Reference in
channel that is used by the module in Calibration. Output Data for Calibration Verification
• 0 = Not sending Cal High Reference
A 0 to 1 transition indicates that the Chxx.Data output tag
Chxx.CalHighRefPassed BOOL data contains the recorded High Reference value for the • 1 = Sending recorded Calibration High
channel that is used by the module in Calibration. Reference Signal in Output Data for Calibration
Verification
Data value change that triggers the channel to complete • 0 = Channel not triggered to complete the
the Calibration procedure, applying the Valid Low and calibration procedure
Chxx.CalFinish BOOL High References received. • 1 = Channel triggered to complete the
Channel exits the Calibration state if successful. calibration procedure
The value that is converted to the signal on the RTB in
Chxx.Data REAL Any valid engineering unit
scaled Engineering Units.

5094-IRT8S Module Tags This section describes the tags associated with the 5094-IRT8S module.

Input Tags
Table 47 describes the 5094-IRT8S module input tags.
Table 47 - 5094-IRT8S Module - Input Tags
Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Module’s operating state
• 1 = Run
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the
module is not connected, it changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the
DiagnosticActive BOOL • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the
prognostics threshold is reached.
prognostics threshold is reached
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition
is detected, and when a distinct diagnostic condition -128…+127
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT transitions from detected to not detected. The value of 0 is skipped except during module
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from power-up.
255 (-1) to 1 skipping zero.
• 0 = Good
• 1 = Bad, causing fault
The typical causes of a fault are the following:
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be – Data signal is under or over range.
trusted for use in the application. – Channel open wire.
CJChxx.Fault BOOL If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to – Field Power is off.
correct the cause of the inaccuracy. We recommend that you first troubleshoot the
The channel is set to Disable. module to see if the typical causes exist.
For more information, see Reset FLEX 5000
safety I/O Modules to Out-of-Box State on
page 74.

150 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 47 - 5094-IRT8S Module - Input Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Uncertain data
The typical causes of uncertain data are the
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but following:
the degree of inaccuracy is not known. – Data signal outside channel operating
If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to range.
CJChxx.Uncertain BOOL – Module has reached a critical operating
correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to temperature or is higher than the
change to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to 0. acceptable operating temperature.
– Data value is NotANumber
– Calibration fault on the channel.
We recommend that you first troubleshoot the
module to see if the typical causes exist.
• 0 = Open Wire condition does not exist.
The signal wire is disconnected from the channel or the • 1 = Open Wire condition exists. That is, a signal
Chxx.OpenWire BOOL RTB is removed from the module. wire is disconnected from the channel or the
RTB is removed from the module.
• 0 = Field Power is present
CJChxx.FieldPowerOff BOOL Field power is not present at the channel.
• 1 = Field Power is not present
• 0 = Bad, causing a fault
CJChxx.Status BOOL Indicates the status of the channel.
• 1 = Good
Indicates if the received Sensor Offset or produced Data • 0 = Sensor offset or Data is a number
CJChxx.NotANumber BOOL is not a number. • 1 = Sensor offset or Data is not a number
• 0 = Channel data is not beneath the
Indicates the channel data is beneath the underrange underrange threshold
CJChxx.Underrange BOOL threshold for this channel. • 1 = Channel data is beneath the underrange
threshold
• 0 = Channel data is not above the overrange
Indicates the channel data is above the overrange threshold
CJChxx.Overrange BOOL threshold for this channel. • 1 = Channel data is above the overrange
threshold
CJChxx.Temperature REAL The current temperature of the cold junction. Any
• 0 = Good
• 1 = Bad, causing fault
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be The typical causes of a fault are the following:
trusted for use in the application. – Data signal is under or over range.
If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to – Channel open wire.
Chxx.Fault BOOL correct the cause of the inaccuracy. – Field Power is off.
The channel is set to Disable. We recommend that you first troubleshoot the
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting module to see if the typical causes exist.
on page 28. For more information, see Reset FLEX 5000
safety I/O Modules to Out-of-Box State on
page 74.
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Uncertain data
The typical causes of uncertain data are the
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but following:
the degree of inaccuracy is not known. – Data signal outside channel operating
If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to range.
Chxx.Uncertain BOOL – Module has reached a critical operating
correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to temperature or is higher than the
change to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to 0. acceptable operating temperature.
– Data value is NotANumber
– Calibration fault on the channel.
We recommend that you first troubleshoot the
module to see if the typical causes exist.
• 0 = Open Wire condition does not exist.
The signal wire is disconnected from the channel or the • 1 = Open Wire condition exists. That is, a signal
Chxx.OpenWire BOOL RTB is removed from the module. wire is disconnected from the channel or the
RTB is removed from the module.
• 0 = Field Power is present
Chxx.FieldPowerOff BOOL Field power is not present at the channel.
• 1 = Field Power is not present
• 0 = Bad, causing a fault
Chxx.Status BOOL Indicates the status of the channel.
• 1 = Good
Indicates if the received Sensor Offset or produced Data • 0 = Sensor offset or Data is a number
Chxx.NotANumber BOOL is not a number. • 1 = Sensor offset or Data is not a number

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 151

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 47 - 5094-IRT8S Module - Input Tags (Continued)

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Channel data is not beneath the
Indicates the channel data is beneath the underrange underrange threshold
Chxx.Underrange BOOL threshold for this channel. • 1 = Channel data is beneath the underrange
threshold
• 0 = Channel data is not above the overrange
Indicates the channel data is above the overrange threshold
Chxx.Overrange BOOL threshold for this channel. • 1 = Channel data is above the overrange
threshold
Triggered when the input data value is less than the Low
Low alarm value.
If latching is enabled, this alarm remains triggered until • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.LLAlarm BOOL unlatched. If latching is not enabled, the alarm clears • 1 = Alarm is triggered
after the input data value is greater than the Low Low
limit and the Alarm Deadband.
Triggered when the input data value is less than the Low
alarm value.
If latching is enabled, this alarm remains triggered until • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.LAlarm BOOL unlatched. If latching is not enabled, the alarm clears • 1 = Alarm is triggered
after the input data value is greater than the Low limit
and the Alarm Deadband.
Triggered when the input data value is greater than the
High alarm value.
If latching is enabled, this alarm remains triggered until • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.HAlarm BOOL unlatched. If latching is not enabled, the alarm clears • 1 = Alarm is triggered
after the input data value is less than the High limit and
the Alarm Deadband.
Triggered when the input data value is greater than the
High High alarm value.
If latching is enabled, this alarm remains triggered until • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.HHAlarm BOOL unlatched. If latching is not enabled, the alarm clears • 1 = Alarm is triggered
after the input data value is less than the High High limit
and the Alarm Deadband.
Triggered when the change between consecutive
channel samples divided by the period of time between • 0 = Alarm is not triggered
Chxx.RateAlarm BOOL when the samples were taken exceeds the Rate Alarm. • 1 = Alarm is triggered
If latched, this tag remains set until it is unlatched.
Indicates the last attempted Calibration for this
channel failed or there is no calibration data present. • 0 = Calibration did not fail
Chxx.CalFault BOOL This tag is cleared, that is, set to 0, when power is cycled • 1 = Calibration failed
to the module.
• 0 = Channel is not being calibrated
Chxx.Calibrating BOOL Indicates the channel is currently being calibrated.
• 1 = Channel is being calibrated
Chxx.Data REAL Channel data in scaled Engineering Units. Any positive or negative value.
Continuously-running 15-bit timer that counts in
milliseconds.
The user program can then use the last two
Chxx.RollingTimestamp INT 0…32767
RollingTimestamp values and calculate the interval
between receipt of data or the time when new data has
been received.

152 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Output Tags
Table 48 describes the 5094-IRT8S module output tags.
Table 48 - 5094-IRT8S Module - Output Tags
Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
Offset added directly to the measured CJ temperature.
CJChxx.SensorOffset REAL Used to compensate for cold junction temperature Any
sensor error.
When the ‘Latch Fault until reset via output tag’ mode is
Enabled, the IO channel will hold safety input fault
indications until it checks that the fault is removed. If Rising edge: the fault status is released if the
Chxx.ResetFault BOOL the fault is removed, it only clears the fault status upon fault has been removed.
detecting that the ResetFault bit in its channel sees a
rising edge.
Enables the Low Low alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.LLAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.
Enables the Low alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.LAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.
Enables the High alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.HAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.
Enables the High High alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.HHAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.
Enables the Rate alarm.
IMPORTANT: To use this alarm, you must not only set the
tag to 1. You must also make sure the Chxx.AlarmDisable • 0 = Alarm is disabled
Chxx.RateAlarmEn BOOL configuration tag for the same channel is set to 0.
If the Chxx.AlarmDisable configuration tag is set to 1, • 1 = Alarm is enabled
that is, alarms are disabled, this alarm does not work
regardless of the tag value.
Unlatches a latched Low Low Alarm at the first instance • 0 = Low Low Alarm remains latched
Chxx.LLAlarmUnlatch BOOL of the bit transitioning from 0 to 1. • 1 = Low Low Alarm unlatches
Unlatches a latched Low Alarm at the first instance of • 0 = Low Alarm remains latched
Chxx.LAlarmUnlatch BOOL the bit transition from 0 to 1. • 1 = Low Alarm unlatches
Unlatches a latched High Alarm at the first instance of • 0 = High Alarm remains latched
Chxx.HAlarmUnlatch BOOL the bit transition from 0 to 1. • 1 = High Alarm unlatches
Unlatches a set High High Alarm at the first instance of • 0 = High High Alarm remains latched
Chxx.HHAlarmUnlatch BOOL the bit transition from 0 to 1. • 1 = High High Alarm unlatches
Unlatches a set Rate Alarm at the first instance of the bit • 0 = Rate Alarm remains latched
Chxx.RateAlarmUnlatch BOOL transition from 0 to 1. • 1 = Rate Alarm unlatches
Compensates for any known offset error on the sensor Any valid float value
or channel to which the sensor is connected. In terms of (We recommend that you use a value in the
Chxx.SensorOffset REAL engineering units.
The value of this tag is added to the measured value in channel’s operating range.)
0.0 = Default
engineering units and is used in the Chxx.Data input tag.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 153

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Notes:

154 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix C
Application/Wiring Examples for Safety I/O
Modules
This appendix provides example wiring diagrams for the FLEX 5000 I/O safety modules that
Applies to these modules: can be used in functional safety applications.
5094 Safety I/O Modules IMPORTANT • Do not connect unused input terminals.
• You must disable 5094-IRT8S module channels during wiring, otherwise
the channels may go into non-recoverable fault due to bouncing of the
signal at the screw.
• Performing a wiring change while the channels are running can trigger a
discrepancy fault.

The wiring configuration affects the safety application level to which a FLEX 5000 I/O safety
module is suitable.

IMPORTANT Conformity to requirements of the safety category and safety integrity

level must be determined for the entire system.
You need to consider fault exclusion specified in each of the wiring
configurations.

5094-IRT8S and The following wiring diagrams show the input modules for Thermocouple and RTD.
5094-IRT8SXT Module IMPORTANT The Safety level shown in the diagrams is applicable to the module
Wiring Diagrams itself. Connected devices must have their own status monitoring to
achieve application safety level.

Figure 17 - 5094-IRT8S Module – SIL 3, Ple, Cat. 4 Thermocouple

SIL Level and Category: Up to SIL 3, PLe, Cat.4 5094-IRT8S

Fault Exclusion: External Wiring fault
Input Type: Thermocouple
Other: Use suitable qualified sensor.
TC(n)+

Vin
TC(n)-
n = 0...7

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 155

Appendix C Application/Wiring Examples for Safety I/O Modules

Figure 18 - 5094-IRT8S Module – SIL 3, Ple, Cat. 4 RTD 2 Wire

5094-IRT8S
SIL Level and Category: Up to SIL 3, PLe, Cat.4
Fault Exclusion: External Wiring Fault
Input Type: RTD
Input Range: xxx 2 wire
Other: Use suitable qualified sensor.

Iexc(n)
Wire 1

Rin

Irtn(n)
Wire 4

n = 0...7

Figure 19 - 5094-IRT8S Module – SIL 3, Ple, Cat. 4 RTD 3 Wire

5094-IRT8S
SIL Level and Category: Up to SIL 3, PLe, Cat.4
Fault Exclusion: External Wiring fault
Input Type: RTD
Input Range: xxx 3 wire
Other: Use suitable qualified sensor.

Iexc(n)
Wire 1

Rin
RTD(n)-
Wire 3
Irtn(n)
Wire 4

n = 0...7

156 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix C Application/Wiring Examples for Safety I/O Modules

Figure 20 - 5094-IRT8S Module – SIL 3, Ple, Cat. 4 RTD 4 Wire

5094-IRT8S
SIL Level and Category: Up to SIL 3, PLe, Cat.4
Fault Exclusion: External Wiring Fault
Input Type: RTD
Input Range: xxx 4 wire
Other: Cross comparison between channel n data and channel m data by
ladder logic must be implemented. Use suitable qualified sensor.

Iexc(n)
Wire 1

Wire 2
RTD(n)+

Rin
RTD(n)-
Wire 3
Irtn(n)
Wire 4

n, m = 0...7

Iexc(m)
Wire 1

RTD(m)+
Wire 2

Rin
RTD(m)-
Wire 3
Irtn(m)
Wire 4

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 157

Appendix C Application/Wiring Examples for Safety I/O Modules

Notes:

158 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Appendix D
Safety Data for Safety I/O Modules
This appendix lists calculated values for probability of a dangerous failure on demand (PFD),
average frequency of a dangerous failure per hour (PFH), and mean time to failure (MTTF). PFD
and PFH calculations comply with IEC61508, edition 2, 2010.

Calculated values of PFD and PFH appear in Table 49. PFD and PFH must be calculated for the
devices within the system to comply with the SIL level that is required for application.

You must be responsible for following the requirements of ISO 13849-1:2015, to assess
Performance Levels in their safety system.

You must functionally test every I/O module by individually toggling each input channel and
also verify that the controller detects it within the safety reaction time (SRT).

For more information, refer to the FLEX 5000 safety controller manuals listed in Additional
Resources on page 11.

FLEX 5000 I/O Safety Input Table 49 lists the safety data for the 5094-IRT8S, 5094-IRT8SXT modules.
Module Safety Data
Table 49 - 5094-IRT8S, 5094-IRT8SXT Safety Parameter Data
Channel Operation Type
Attribute Dual-channel in the Same Dual-channel in Different
Single Channel
Group(1) Group Combinations(2)
Total Failure Rate (λ (safety related)) 1.175E-06 1.26E-06 1.770E-06
Safe Failure Fraction (SFF) 99.96% 99.97% 99.99%
Safe Failure Rate (λS) 7.503E-07 7.945E-07 1.060E-06
Diagnostic Coverage (DC) 99.90% 99.91% 99.97%
Safe Detected Failure Rate (λSD) 7.496E-07 7.938E-07 1.060E-06
Safe Undetected Failure Rate (λSU) 7.545E-10 7.160E-10 3.460E-10
Dangerous Failure Rate (λD) 4.243E-07 4.685E-07 7.103E-07
Dangerous Detected Failure Rate (λDD) 4.239E-07 4.681E-07 7.100E-07
Dangerous Undetected Failure Rate (λDU) 4.267E-10 4.222E-10 2.318E-10
Diagnostic Test Interval (hours) 4 4 4
Hardware Fault Tolerance (HFT) 0 1 1
Spurious Trip Rate (STR) 3.900E-06 5.222E-06 6.026E-06
Mean Time to Failure, Spurious (MTTF-spurious), (hours) 256381 191516 165936
PFH (1/hours) 4.267E-10 4.222E-10 2.318E-10
PFDAVE, at Mission Time of 20 years 3.738E-05 3.699E-05 2.030E-05
Safety Reaction Time (SRT), (millisecond) 10 10 10
(1) Group definitions: Group 0 (Channel 0 and 2), Group 1 (Channel 1 and 3), Group 2 (Channel 4 and 6), Group 3 (Channel 5 and 7).
(2) Group combinations not represented in note (1).

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 159

Appendix D Safety Data for Safety I/O Modules

Safety Reaction Time The safety reaction time (SRT) is a consideration of delays or latencies within the safety
system.
(5094-IRT8S,
• SRT on Demand is the response time interval between a signal change on the input
5094-IRT8SXT) terminal and producing or providing the safety packet on the backplane.
• SRT on Fault is the response time between the occurrence of an internal fault in the
channel/module and the channel/module going into a safe state.
• SRT on External Wiring Fault is the response time between the occurrence of an
external wiring fault and the channel/s going into a safe state.
Table 50 - Safety Reaction Time
SRT (Safety Demand Rate less than once per 2.1 s)
SRT on Demand 10 ms
SRT on Fault 10 ms
SRT on Open Wire detected 100 ms (RTD), 200 ms (TC), 350 ms (mV)

4. Timing subjected to an RPI of 2 ms and same 10 KHz Notch filter for both channels in
same isolation group.
5. For different RPI, extend the timing by the RPI value.
6. For different notch filters:
a. SRT on Demand and on Fault – Extend the timing with the value in Table 51:
Table 51 - SRT on Demand and on Fault
CHn/CHn+2 Not Used 10 KHz 5 KHz 2.5 KHz 1 KHz 500 Hz 200 Hz 100 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 20 Hz 10 Hz 5 Hz
Not Used — 0 2 8 14 20 50 80 152 182 452 902 962
10 KHz 0 0 2 8 14 20 50 80 152 182 452 902 962
5 KHz 2 2 8 8 14 20 50 80 152 182 452 902 962
2.5 KHz 8 8 8 8 14 20 50 80 158 188 458 908 962
1 KHz 14 14 14 14 20 26 56 86 158 188 458 908 968
500 Hz 20 20 20 20 26 38 62 92 170 200 470 920 980
200 Hz 50 50 50 50 56 62 92 122 194 224 494 944 1004
100 Hz 80 80 80 80 86 92 122 152 224 254 524 974 1034
60 Hz 152 152 152 158 158 170 194 224 302 332 602 1052 1112
50 Hz 182 182 182 188 188 200 224 254 362 632 1082 1142
20 Hz 452 452 452 458 458 470 494 524 602 632 902 1352 1412
10 Hz 902 902 902 908 908 920 944 974 1052 1082 1352 1802 1862
5 Hz 962 962 962 962 968 980 1004 1034 1112 1142 1412 1862 1922

CH0 and CH2 has notch filter 60 Hz and 20 Hz respectively.

The SRT on Demand for CH0 = 10 + 602 = 612 ms
The SRT on Demand for CH2 = 10 + 602 = 612 ms
b. SRT on Open Wire detected – Extend the timing with the value in Table 52:
Table 52 - SRT on Open Wire Detected
Notch Filter RTD TC mV
5…60 Hz 1900 ms 1800 ms 1500 ms
100 Hz…10 KHz 0 0 0

160 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Index

Numerics controller organizer

monitor tag 99
5094-IRT8S module view module tag 99
recoverable faults 60 copper offset
safety data 159
5094-IRT8S module 56
unrecoverable faults 60
5094-IY8 module 56
critical temperature detection
A 5094-IRT8S module 58
absolute module accuracy 34
alarm deadband D
5094-IF8 module 40 data exchange
5094-IRT8S module 53
data echo 66
5094-IY8 module 53
data noise transient
alarms
digital filter usage
clamp alarming
5094-IF8 module 38
5094-OF8 module 65
5094-IRT8S module 49
process alarms 39 - 41, 51 - 53
5094-IY8 module 49
rate alarm 53
5094-IF8 module 41 data tags
fault and status reporting
5094-IF8 module 42
C 5094-IRT8S module 60
5094-IY8 module 60
calibration 5094-OF8 module 67
absolute module accuracy 34 data transmission
input module 110 - 114 multicast method 19
input module reference value 101, 110 data types 20
Logix Designer application 109 - 117
output module 114 - 117 available with I/O modules 19
output module reference value 114 define module
safety input module 100 Logix Designer application 80, 94
channel offset digital filter
5094-OF8 module 63 5094-IF8 module 38
CIP Sync Time 31 5094-IRT8S module 49
5094-IY8 module 49
clamp limit
digital I/O module
5094-OF8 module 65
configuration 91
clamping
5094-OF8 module 65
cold junction compensation E
Logix Designer application 86
compatible Logix 5000 controllers 13 EDS
See electronic data sheet
configuration
electronic data sheet 10
Logix Designer application 75 - 88, 91
electronic keying 25, 30, 80
Calibration category 83, 86, 88, 99
Channels category 82, 83, 86, 96
CJ Channels category 86
Connection category 80, 94 F
General category 79, 93 fault and status reporting 124 - 127
module definition 80, 94 5094-IF8 module 42
Module Info category 81, 96 5094-IRT8S module 60
module tags 129 - 150 5094-IY8 module 60
configure 5094-OF8 module 67
with Logix Designer application 29 fault handling
connection 10 5094-OF8 module 64
fault handling faults
5094-OF8 module 64 recoverable 60
inhibit the module 81 unrecoverable 60
connection category 94 field power loss detection
safety I/O modules 94 5094-IRT8S module 58
connection types 19, 80 5094-IY8 module 58
firmware
obtain from PCDC 34
Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 161
Index

G module definition
dialog box 94
general category 93
module feature
10 Ohm copper offset
H 5094-IRT8S module 56
5094-IY8 module 56
hold for initialization alarm deadband
5094-OF8 module 63 5094-IF8 module 40
5094-IRT8S module 53
5094-IY8 module 53
I channel offset
5094-OF8 module 63
I/O status indicator
clamp limit
description 122 - 124 5094-OF8 module 65
display 120 - 123 clamping
input range 5094-OF8 module 65
5094-IF8 module 35 cold junction compensation
5094-IRT8S module 45 5094-IRT8S module 58
5094-IY8 module 45 5094-IY8 module 58
critical temperature detection
5094-IRT8S module 58
L data echo
limiting 5094-OF8 modules 66
digital filter
5094-OF8 module 65
5094-IF8 module 38
line noise
5094-IRT8S module 49
reduce with the Notch Filter 5094-IY8 module 49
5094-IF8 module 35 - 38 field power loss detection
5094-IRT8S module 46 - 49 5094-IRT8S module 58
5094-IY8 module 46 - 49 5094-IY8 module 58
Logix 5000 controllers hold for initialization
compatible with FLEX 5000 I/O modules 13 5094-OF8 module 63
ownership of FLEX 5000 I/O modules 18 input ranges
Logix Designer application 29 5094-IF8 module 35
calibration 109 - 117 5094-IRT8S module 45
input module 110 - 114 5094-IY8 module 45
output module 114 - 117 limiting
safety input module 100 5094-OF8 module 65
Calibration category 83, 86, 88, 99 no load detection
Channels category 82, 83, 86, 96 5094-OF8 module 66
CJ Channels category 86 notch filter
configuration overview 19 5094-IF8 module 35 - 38
configure a FLEX 5000 I/O system 75 - 88 5094-IRT8S module 46 - 49
configure safety I/O modules 91 5094-IY8 module 46 - 49
Connection category 80, 94 open wire detection
connection types 19 5094-IF8 module 41
digital I/O module configuration 91 5094-IRT8S module 57
General category 79, 93 5094-IY8 module 57
module definition 80, 94 output range
Module Info category 81, 96 5094-OF8 module 63
module tag definitions 129 over temperature detection
module tags 5094-IF8 module 42
5094-IF8 module 130 - 135 5094-IRT8S module 58
5094-IRT8S module 150 - 153 5094-IY8 module 58
5094-IY8 module 136 - 145 5094-OF8 module 67
5094-OF8 module 145 - 150 process alarms
fault and status reporting 42, 60, 61 5094-IF8 module 39 - 41
name module tag 129 5094-IRT8S module 51 - 53
tag editor 127 5094-IY8 module 51 - 53
troubleshooting 124 - 127 ramping
view module tag 89, 99 5094-OF8 module 65
rate alarm
5094-IF8 module 41
M 5094-IRT8S module 53
5094-IY8 module 53
masters 10 rate limiting
module accuracy 5094-OF8 module 65
absolute 34 sensor offset
drift with temperature 34 5094-IF8 module 41

162 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 Index

5094-IRT8S module 56 5094-OF8 module 64

5094-IY8 module 56 output device
sensor type available operating range 63
5094-IRT8S module 54 - 56 output range
5094-IY8 module 54 - 56 5094-OF8 module 63
short circuit protection over temperature detection
5094-OF8 module 66
underrange/overrange detection 5094-IF8 module 42
5094-IF8 module 38 5094-IRT8S module 58
5094-IRT8S module 50 5094-IY8 module 58
5094-IY8 module 50 5094-OF8 module 67
module info category ownership 18
safety I/O modules 96
module keying 17
module status indicator
P
description 119 - 120 PCDC
display 120 - 123 obtain firmware 34
module tag PFD 10
viewing 99 See probability of failure on demand.
module tags PFH 10
5094-IF8 module 130 - 135 See probability of failure per hour.
5094-IRT8S module 150 - 153 probability of failure
5094-IY8 module 136 - 145 on demand 10
5094-OF8 module 145 - 150 per hour 10
definitions 129 process alarms
fault and status reporting 5094-IF8 module 39 - 41
5094-IF8 module 42 5094-IRT8S module 51 - 53
5094-IRT8S module 60 5094-IY8 module 51 - 53
5094-IY8 module 60 proof test 10
5094-OF8 module 67
naming 129
tag editor 127
viewing 89
R
module types 16 ramping
multicast 5094-OF8 module 65
data broadcast method 22 rate alarm
5094-IF8 module 41
5094-IRT8S module 53
N 5094-IY8 module 53
rate limiting
no load detection
5094-OF8 module 65
5094-OF8 module 66 RPI
noise immunity
related to noise rejection
via Notch Filter 5094-IF8 module 36
5094-IF8 module 35 - 38 5094-IY8 module 47
5094-IRT8S module 46 - 49 valid value 20
5094-IY8 module 46 - 49
noise rejection
related to multiple input channel usage S
5094-IF8 module 37
related to RPI setting SA Power status indicator
5094-IF8 module 36 description 119
5094-IY8 module 47 display 120 - 123
Notch Filter safety data
5094-IF8 module 35 - 38 5094-IRT8S module 159
5094-IRT8S module 46 - 49 safety I/O modules
5094-IY8 module 46 - 49 configuration signature and ownership 73
reset to out-of-box state 74
safe state 72
O safety application requirements 72
ODVA 10 safety precautions 71
safety network number 10
open wire detection
safety parameter data 159
5094-IF8 module 41
5094-IRT8S module 57 safety reaction time 160
5094-IY8 module 57 SRT on demand and on fault 160
output behavior SRT on open wire detected 160
after connection fault

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 163

Index

sensor error
channel offset
5094-OF8 module 63
sensor offset
5094-IF8 module 41
5094-IRT8S module 56
5094-IY8 module 56
sensor type
temperature limit
5094-IRT8S module 54
5094-IY8 module 54
to use with 5094-IRT8S module 54 - 56
to use with 5094-IY8 module 54 - 56
short circuit protection
5094-OF8 module 66
signal threshold
5094-IF8 module 38
5094-IRT8S module 50
5094-IY8 module 50
slaves 10
SNN 10
See safety network number.
standard 10
status indicator, description
I/O status indicator 122 - 124
module status indicator 119 - 120
SA Power status indicator 119
status indicator, display
I/O status indicator 120 - 123
module status indicator 120 - 123
SA Power status indicator 120 - 123

T
temperature
effect on module accuracy 34
thermoelectric effect
cold junction compensation 58
troubleshooting 119 - 127
input module status indicator 120
Logix Designer application 124 - 127
module status indicator 17, 119
output module status indicator 123
tag editor 127

U
underrange/overrange detection
5094-IF8 module 38
5094-IRT8S module 50
5094-IY8 module 50
unicast
data broadcast method 22

164 Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

 FLEX 5000 Analog I/O Modules User Manual

Rockwell Automation Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025 165

Rockwell Automation Support
Use these resources to access support information.
Find help with how-to videos, FAQs, chat, user forums, Knowledgebase, and product
Technical Support Center rok.auto/support
notification updates.
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the telephone number for your country. rok.auto/phonesupport
Quickly access and download technical specifications, installation instructions, and user
Technical Documentation Center rok.auto/techdocs
manuals.
Literature Library Find installation instructions, manuals, brochures, and technical data publications. rok.auto/literature
Product Compatibility and Download Center Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access product rok.auto/pcdc
(PCDC) release notes.

Documentation Feedback
Your comments help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve our content, complete the
form at rok.auto/docfeedback.

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

At the end of life, this equipment should be collected separately from any unsorted municipal waste.

Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental compliance information on its website at rok.auto/pec.

Allen-Bradley, CompactLogix, ControlFLASH, ControlLogix, FLEX 5000, GuardLogix, Integrated Architecture, Logix 5000, Rockwell Automation, Rockwell Software, RSNetworx,
Safety Automation Builder, Studio 5000, and Studio 5000 Logix Designer are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
CIP, CIP Safety, CIP Sync, ControlNet, DeviceNet, and EtherNet/IP are trademarks of ODVA, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş. Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752, İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400 EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur

Publication 5094-UM002E-EN-P - March 2025

Supersedes Publication 5094-UM002D-EN-P - November 2021 Copyright © 2025 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.